Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 374

Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009
© 2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be
reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.

Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.

Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS.

Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December,
3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD
Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk
Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch,
AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner,
Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next>
(design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio,
Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF,
Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax,
Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor
LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox,
MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall,
Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ,
Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo),
SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual
Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo).

The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries:
Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks.

The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA
(design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert.

Third Party Software Program Credits


ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc.
Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved.
InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved.
PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult
current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into
memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product.
Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved.
Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German
Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin.
Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992.
Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved.
Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™.
WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock®
AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved.
The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan
Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within
this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).
Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No.
5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending.
Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc.
OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved.
OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved.
OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002.
FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.
ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights
reserved.
RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.
Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent
JPEG Group.
Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions
of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited
to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or
contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not
limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory
of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions
of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright ©
1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is
hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and
related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the
software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.
Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice
shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
Government Use
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.
Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3


What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7


Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27


Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Creating and Applying a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45


Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v
Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Working with the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79


Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109


Adding Mechanical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Inspecting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157


Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167


Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219


Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221


Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents
Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267


Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279


Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307


Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321


Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335


Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Contents | vii
viii
Introduction

In this tutorial, you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. You also learn how to
use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally, you learn how to create and set up an
MEP project.

1
2
Using the Tutorials
1
This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials, including an overview of the
building information model that you design in the tutorials, and where to find the training files required to complete the
exercises.
The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons
in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson.

NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit
MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

What is in the Tutorials


In these tutorials, you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. The technical
training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich, Germany. This building is
also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials.

How the tutorials are organized


The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical, electrical, and plumbing engineering workflows.
You complete the following phases of design:

■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format.

■ Add basic MEP elements, such as duct, fixtures, and piping.

■ Add more detailed modelling elements, such as mechanical equipment, electrical panels, and plumbing
fixtures.

3
■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements.

■ Create schedules, views, and sheets to document the project.

■ Create detail views, annotations, and tags.

The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. You do not design entire systems, but only enough
of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. For example, when you add ductwork,
you only draw the duct in one wing of the building.
When you open a training file, you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically
added in an exercise. For example, to provide a richer and more finished design, elements such as additional
ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. These elements enhance the
exercises you complete.

Accessing Training Files


Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the
tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save
them.

Locate the training files


The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website
for the tutorial content and training files. When you install the training files as instructed, they are copied
to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training.
Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder:

■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an _i suffix.

■ Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an _m suffix.

NOTE Depending on your installation, your Training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD
manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training
files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the
tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

Use the training files


A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that
are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the
training file to be used with the tutorial.
The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. So, you can complete any exercise without
first completing the preceding exercises. On the Contents tab, the tutorials are grouped and presented in a
recommended order for optimal learning; however, the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order.
After completing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is recommended that you
begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Each training file includes the work from the previous
exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.

Open a training file

1 Click ➤ Open.

4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials


NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu, the Open dialog displays, and you can open any
supported file type. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option, a list of file types displays.
Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
3 In the right pane, double-click Imperial or Metric, depending on the instructions in the tutorial.

4 Click the training file name, and click Open.


Save a training file

5 To save a training file with a new name, click ➤ Save As.

NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. A training file is provided as a starting
point for each exercise.

6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:


■ For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file.
You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location.

■ For File name, enter the new file name.


A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes.
For example, if you open settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new
name such as settings_modified.rvt.

■ For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and click Save.

Close a training file

7 Click ➤ Close.
8 If you have made changes, you are prompted to save the changes. You may close the file with
or without saving changes.

Accessing Training Files | 5


6
Understanding the Basics
2
In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin
with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, and
how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Understanding the Concepts


What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010?
The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that
supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling
(BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it.
In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information
from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP
collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other
representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes
made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?


The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination
and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by
the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics
that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is
parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP:
Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the
entire project.
The following are examples of these element relationships:

■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you
move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition.

■ Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed,
the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a
proportional characteristic.

■ The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the
floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

7
How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate
changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links.
When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects
that change to any affected elements.
Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of
relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The
result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant
to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler


In projects, Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements:

■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They display in relevant views of the
design. For example, sinks, boilers, ducts, sprinklers, and electrical panels.

■ Datum elements help to define project context. For example, grids, levels, and reference planes are datum
elements.

■ View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or
document the design. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

There are 2 types of model elements:


■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, walls and
ceilings are hosts.

■ Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example, sinks, boilers,
ducts, sprinklers, and electrical panels.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:


■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For
example, dimensions, tags, and keynotes are annotation elements.

■ Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Examples include
detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics


This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and
modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric
elements in Revit MEP.
In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. The context
is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with
other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do
and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning to
walls.

Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms


Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to
most engineers. However, some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial
to understanding the software.
Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building
information model. The project file contains all information for the building design, from geometry to
construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project,
and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design
and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and
so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project.
Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs,
floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. You
create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of
wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
North - Elevation View

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Revit
MEP classifies elements by categories, families, and types.

Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. For
example, categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. Categories of
annotation elements include tags and symbols.

Understanding the Concepts | 9


Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of
parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family
may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is
the same. For example, a lighting fixture could be considered one family, although the pendant lights that
compose the family come in different sizes and materials.
There are 3 kinds of families:
■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine
the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.

■ System families include ducts, pipes, and wires. They are not available for loading or creating as separate
files.
■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families.

■ You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project.
For example, the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. However, you can create
different types of fittings with different compositions.

■ System families can be transferred between projects.

■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. Create an in-place family
when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain
one of more relationships to other project geometry.
■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project, each in-place family contains only
a single type. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects, and you can place copies of
the same in-place family element in your projects. Unlike system and standard component families,
you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types.

Type: Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a 30” X 42” title
block. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions.
Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific
locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Using the Revit MEP User Interface


Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. Its interface resembles
those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks.

Parts of the Revit Interface


The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. With a few clicks, you can change the interface
to better support the way that you work. For example, you can set the ribbon to one of the three display
settings for optimum use of the interface. You can also display several project views at one time, or layer
the views to see only the one on top.
Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. Then experiment
with them, hiding, showing, and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work.

10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics


Ribbon Overview
The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file, and provides all the tools necessary to
create your file. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order, or moving a panel off the ribbon to
your desktop. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area.

To move panels:

■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon.

■ Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. To return the panel to the ribbon,
click the Return Panels to Ribbon button, or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab.

To minimize the ribbon

1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs.

2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options:

■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon.

■ Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels.

■ Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels.

Ribbon Tabs and Panels

TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides, you can click the top (or left) side to access
the tool you probably use most often. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools.

Parts of the Revit Interface | 11


Examples of button
that can be clicked
on two sides

The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain.
There are a number of button types on the ribbon

Ribbon Tab Includes commands for...

Home many of the tools you need to create the


MEP design.

Create (family files only) many of the tools you need to create and
modify a family of elements.

Insert tools to add and manage secondary items


such as raster images, and CAD files.

Annotate tools used for adding 2D information to a


design.

Modify tools used for editing existing elements,


data and systems. When working on the
Modify tab, select the tool first, then select
what you want to modify.

Analyze tools used for running analysis on the cur-


rent design.

Architect architect-specific tools.

Collaborate tools for collaboration with internal and


external project team members.

View tools used for managing and modifying


the current view, and for switching views.

Manage project and system parameters, and set-


tings.

Add-Ins third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit


MEP 2010. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only
when a third-party tool is installed.

12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics


Expanded Panels
A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional
tools and controls. By default, an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. To
keep a panel expanded, click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel.

A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog.

Contextual Ribbon Tabs


When you execute certain commands or select an element, a special contextual ribbon tab displays that
contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command.
For example, when adding duct, a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels:

■ Selection: contains the Modify command.

■ Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector.

■ Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct.

This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command.

Application Frame Overview


The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects.
The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table:

Application Window Tool Description

opens the application menu (single -click).


application button closes the application menu (double-click).

application menu provides access to common tools.

Quick Access toolbar displays frequently used tools.

InfoCenter provides requested information.

Status Bar displays information related to the current


state of a Revit operation.

Parts of the Revit Interface | 13


The Application Menu

The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your
files using more advanced commands, such as Export and Publish.

NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.

Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.

Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions:

On the application menu, click... to...

select a template and create a new draw-


ing.
(New)

select a file to open.


(Open)

save the current drawing.


(Save)

save the current drawing with a new name.

(Save As)

export the current drawing.

(Export)

14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics


On the application menu, click... to...

publish the current project.

(Publish)

print the current drawing.

(Print)

access product and license information.


(Licensing)

close the file.


(Close)

Using the Quick Access Toolbar


The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default:

Quick Access Toolbar Item Description

opens a project, family, annotation, or


(Open)
template file.

saves a current project, family, annotation,


(Save)
or template file.

cancels the last action by default and dis-


(Undo)
plays a list of all actions taken during the
session.

reinstates the last cancelled action and


(Redo)
displays a list of all reinstated actions per-
formed during the session.

enters selection mode and ends the current


(Modify)
operation.

synchronizes a local file with that on the


(Synchronize and Modify Settings)
central server.

provides views including Default 3D,


(3D View)
Camera, and Walkthrough.

customizes the items displayed on the


(Customize Quick Access Toolbar)
Quick Access toolbar. To enable or disable
a tool item, click next to it on the Custom-
ize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.

NOTE New displays on the Customize


Quick Access Toolbar drop-down, but is
not enabled by default.

Parts of the Revit Interface | 15


To undo or redo a series of operations, click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. This
displays the command history in a list. Starting with the most recent command, you can select any number
of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation.
The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize
Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting.

While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures), or the Family Editor, items that are added to the
Quick Access toolbar from the Create, Modify, Group, Clipboard, or View Graphics panels persist on the
toolbar for that mode. However, when you switch to another editing mode, these items do not display and
need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar.

NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar.

Status Bar
The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. When you are using a
command, the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. When you are highlighting
an element or component, the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type.

Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar

■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first.

■ Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable, workshared components.

■ Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components.

■ Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option.

■ Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a
view.

To hide the Status Bar, click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Clear the Status Bar
check mark. To show the Status Bar again, repeat the command.

Getting Hints About What to Do Next


If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next, check the Status Bar. It often
displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. In addition, a tool tip appears next
to the cursor, displaying the same information.

16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics


To cancel or exit the current command, do either of the following:

■ Press ESC twice.

■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click (Modify).

Options Bar
The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Its contents change depending on the current command or
selected element.

Type Selector
The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool, for example, Place a Wall.
Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. When you place an element
in a drawing, use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add.

To change existing elements to a different type, select one or more elements of the same category. Then use
the Type Selector to select the desired type.

View Control Bar


The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. It provides quick
access to functions that affect the drawing area, including the following:

Parts of the Revit Interface | 17


■ Scale

■ Detail Level

■ Model Graphics Style

■ Shadows On/Off

■ Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view.

■ Crop View On/Off

■ Show/Hide Crop Region

■ Temporary Hide/Isolate

■ Reveal Hidden Elements

Modifying the View


In this exercise, you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. After you are familiar
with these tasks, it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.

Zoom the view


In the tutorials, you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. For
example, you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or
floor plan in the view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design
in the window.
There are several ways to access zoom options. In the following steps, you open a training file and practice
adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.

1 Click ➤ Open.
2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i.rvt.
The 3D isometric view displays:

3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. (The Navigation
bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.)
The zoom menu lists the zoom options.

18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics


NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command.

4 Click Zoom Out (2x).


In the drawing area, the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design.

5 Click Zoom To Fit.


The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window.

6 Click in the drawing area, and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region.
The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.

7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify; this is referred to
as a crossing selection.

When you release the mouse button, the view zooms in on the selected area.

8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button, you can roll the wheel to zoom the
view. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again.
If you do not have a wheel mouse, use a zoom menu command to zoom out.

NOTE As you zoom in and out, Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than
2mm in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments, click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings
panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.

Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation


tools.

9 To display SteeringWheels, on the Navigation bar, click .

NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface
drop-down and select Navigation bar.

Modifying the View | 19


The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area.

As you move the mouse, the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area.

10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights.
11 Click and hold the mouse button.
The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool.

12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out.


13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in.
You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button, moving the wheel to the desired
location, and then using the Zoom tool again.
For more information about SteeringWheels, press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. To

define settings for SteeringWheels, click ➤ Options, and click tin the Options dialog, click
the SteeringWheels tab.

14 To exit the wheel, press ESC.


Reorient the view

You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view
15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the
direction indicator. Click and drag to orbit the design.

16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design.

20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics


17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view.

Performing Common Tasks


In this exercise, you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials.
After you are familiar with these tasks, it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each
tutorial.

Resize an element using drag controls

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans,
and open Level 2 - HVAC Plan - Design.
When drawing or modifying an MEP design, it is important to understand how to adjust the
size of components in the drawing area. Small blue dots, called drag controls, display at the
ends of selected objects in a plan view. Similar controls, referred to as shape handles, display
along the ends, bottoms, and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views.

2 Enter ZR, zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan, and select the duct, as shown.
Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. These are the drag controls.

Performing Common Tasks | 21


3 Click and drag the bottom control, moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.

4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct.

Undo commands

5 On the Quick Access toolbar, click the drop-down menu next to (Undo).
All changes you make to a project are tracked. The Undo command allows you to reverse the
effects of one or more commands. In this example, you decide that you prefer to leave the duct
as is.

6 On the Undo menu, select the first item in the list, Move.
Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. All commands are canceled up
to and including the selected command.

NOTE To quickly undo the previous action, on the Standard toolbar, click the Undo command, or
press CTRL+Z.

Move an element

7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps.

22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics


8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.
Some commands, such as Move and Copy, require 2 clicks to complete the command. After
selecting the element to move, for example, click to specify the starting position, and click again
to specify the ending position. In this case, you want to move the duct.

9 Click the midpoint of the duct.

10 Move the cursor to the right, as shown.

The duct is moved to the new position.

Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.


11 With the duct already selected, and drag it to the left as shown.

Performing Common Tasks | 23


End a command

Some commands, such as the Modify Ducts command, stay active or current until you choose another
command or end the current command.

12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.


13 To end a command, you can also:
■ Choose another command.

■ Press ESC twice.

Override the display of objects

You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. For example, you can
specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct
and disable the display of return duct.
14 Enter VG.
15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, under Visibility:
■ Clear Mechanical - Return.

■ Select Mechanical - Supply.

■ Click OK.

Notice that the return air duct is not displayed.

16 On the Quick Access toolbar, click the drop-down menu next to (Undo) to redisplay the
supply return air duct.

24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics


17 Close the file without saving your changes.

Performing Common Tasks | 25


26
Getting Started with MEP
Projects 3
In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template, link files, use copy/monitor, create and manage views, and
modify system settings. You also learn how to use collaboration tools, such as coordination review and interference
checking.

Creating an MEP Project


In this exercise, you learn how to start a project from a template. You then learn how to customize the
template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. Finally, you learn how to organize the
project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files.
A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions, such as the default project
units and settings; the default building levels and standard views; system families, such as ducts and pipes;
and loadable families. You can either select a template from the template library, or you can save a project
and use it as a new project template. New projects inherit all the families, settings, and geometry from the
starting template.

Start a project from an existing template

1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project.


2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse.
3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training files, and open
Imperial ➤ Templates.
You can choose from several templates. The template selection may vary depending on your
installation.
The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting
point. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. In that case,
you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the
other templates.

4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default.rte template, and click Open.


5 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project.
6 Click OK.

27
7 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation), and open North.
8 In the drawing area, zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads.
9 Close the file with or without saving it.
10 Using the same method, create another new project using the Construction template.
Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. Notice that
construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have
been modified to maximize the use of various tools.

11 Close the file with or without saving it.


Create a new project template based on the default systems template

12 Click ➤ New ➤ Project.


13 In the New Project dialog:
■ Under Template file, click Browse.

■ In the Choose Template dialog, navigate to Imperial Templates, and select the
Systems-Default_Imperial.rte template and click Open.

TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. If you want to use a template other
than the default, you can select it now.

■ Under Create new, select Project template.

■ Click OK.

Modify project settings

Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. To
maintain office standards and reduce rework, you can establish settings that are common to most projects.
For example, you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. When you select the material,
you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered.

14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information.


15 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Energy Analysis, for Energy Data, click Edit.
16 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ For Building Type, select School or University.

■ For Location, click (Browse).

■ In the Manage Place and Locations dialog:

■ On the Place tab, for City, select Manchester, NH.

■ For Building Construction, click (Browse).


■ In the Building Construction dialog, review the construction materials listed.

■ Click Cancel.

■ For Ground Plane, select Level 1.

■ Click OK twice.

17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.


18 In the Project Parameters dialog, select Sub-Discipline and click Modify.

28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects


19 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ For Group parameter under, select Identity Data.

■ For Categories, select Views.

■ Click OK twice.

Modify mechanical settings

Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a
project. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. After standard settings
have been established for an organization, they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set
them for each project.
Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical,
piping, plumbing, and fire protection systems.

20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings.
Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when
sizing or laying out ducts.
21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog, under Duct Settings, click Rectangular.
22 In the right pane, for 3 1/2", 4 1/2", and 5 1/2", clear the check boxes under the Used in Size
Lists and Used in Sizing columns.
23 In the left pane, under Duct Settings, click Round.
24 In the right pane, for 3 1/2", 4 1/2", 5 1/2", 10 1/2", 11 1/2", and 12 1/2", clear the check boxes
under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.
25 In the left pane, under Pipe Settings, click Sizes.
26 In the right pane, for 3/4", clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing
columns.
27 Click OK.
Modify electrical settings

Electrical settings determine the voltage, power distribution systems, wiring, and demand factors for electrical
systems.
Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family.

28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.


29 In the Load Family dialog:
■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder.

■ Holding CTRL, select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark.rfa and click
Open.

30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.
31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog, click Wiring.
32 In the right pane:
■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark, ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected.

■ For Ground Wire Tick Mark, ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.

■ For Neutral Wire Tick Mark, ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.

33 Click OK.

Creating an MEP Project | 29


Organize the Project Browser

The Project Browser lists all the views, families, sheets, and groups that are contained in a project. You can
customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders.
You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. In addition, you can
specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser.

34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization.
35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog, select Type/Discipline and click Edit.
36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog:
■ For Group by, select Sub-Discipline.

■ For Then by, select Family and Type.

■ For Then by, select Associated Level.

■ For Sort by, select View Name.

■ Select Ascending

■ Click OK twice.

37 Save this file to a location on your local system.


Notice that the file is saved as a template. You can use these techniques to create templates that
are customized to your projects.

38 Close the file.

Linking Projects
In this exercise, you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project, synchronize the two models
for monitoring changes, and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. An architect has
created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. You need to create
the MEP model for the project. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building
envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. To enable this coordination, you link the architectural
model with the MEP model.

Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson

1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project.


2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse.
3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open.
4 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project.
5 Click OK.
Link a file

6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit.


7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog:
■ In the left pane, click Training.

■ Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i.rvt.

■ From the Positioning list, select Auto - Origin to Origin.

■ Click Open.

30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects


The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active.

8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces

9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model.


10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.
11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding.
12 Click OK.
13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model.
Add levels

14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open
North - Mech.
15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31
16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level.
17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types.
18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK.
19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor.
20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3.
21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof.
22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.
Adjust level lines

You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model.
23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER.


25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects


Monitor the architectural levels

You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not
synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored
element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed,
or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original
element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted.
Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a
host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor

changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements,
indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a
monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed.

26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link.


27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model.
The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed.

28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor.


29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model
level line labeled 01-Entry Level.

appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated.

30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4.
31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool.
Disable the display of architectural levels

32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics.


33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host
View.
34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom.
35 On the Annotation Categories tab:
■ For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33
■ Select Show categories from all disciplines.

■ Under Visibility, deselect Levels.

■ Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template


In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template.

Create a view template

1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current
view.
2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK.
3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit.
4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom.
5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom.
6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ For Model Categories, select Custom.

■ Select Show categories from all disciplines.

■ Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography.

■ Click OK.

7 Click OK twice.
Apply a view template

8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building


Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects


9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings


In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each
computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options


In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These
settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options,
and your username when using worksharing.

Set graphics settings

1 Click ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.
3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK.

4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.


5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse.
6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open
Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte.
7 Click OK.
Notice that the drawing area is black.

8 Click ➤ Options.
9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35


10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color.
11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK.

NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error
display using this color.

12 Click the General tab.


13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ For Save reminder interval, select One hour.

■ For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK.
15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall.
16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area.
17 Press ESC to end the command.
18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red.

19 Press ESC to end the command.


20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it.
Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the
highlighted element.

21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations


In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP
files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries.

Set file locations

1 Click ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab.
3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects


Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click ➤ New ➤ Project,
and click Browse to select a template.

4 Click Cancel.
5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.
6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open.
7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse.
This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates
that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path.
However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a
large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive.

8 Click Cancel.
Specify library settings and create a new library

9 In the Options dialog, click Places.


10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names.
The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path
points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library
names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left
pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder
located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries
display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37


11 In the Places dialog, click (Add Value).
12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library, and change the name to My Library.
13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library, and click (Browse).
14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit
MEP projects, templates, or families, and click Open.

TIP You may want to create a new folder first, and select it as the library path.

The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.
The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog.

15 Under Library Name, click My Library.

16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list, and click OK twice.

17 Click ➤ Open.
18 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the My Library icon.

38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects


Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. If you work in a large office, you
may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain
office standards.

19 Click Cancel.

20 Click ➤ Options.
21 On the File Locations tab, click Places.
22 Select My Library.

23 Click (Remove Value) to delete the library.


24 Click OK.
Specify rendering settings

25 Click the Rendering tab.


26 Under Render Appearance Library Location, view the current path.
This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. This path is determined during
installation. If you want to relocate this path, specify the new location here.
Under Additional Render Appearance Paths, you can specify the locations of other files used to
define render appearances, such as bump maps, custom color files, and decal image files.

27 Click OK.

Specifying Spelling Options


In this exercise, you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP.

Modify spelling settings

1 Click ➤ Options.
2 In the Options dialog, click the Spelling tab.
3 Under Settings, select Ignore words in uppercase.
4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check, click Edit.
The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor.

5 In the text editor, enter sheetmtl-Cu.


6 Click File menu ➤ Save.
7 Click File menu ➤ Exit.
8 Under Building industry dictionary, click Edit.
9 In the text editor, scroll down to view the list of building industry terms.
10 Click File menu ➤ Exit.
11 In the Options dialog, click OK.
12 Create a new project using the default template.
13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.
14 Click in the drawing area, and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU.
15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.
16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling.
Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary.
It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase.

Specifying Spelling Options | 39


17 In the Spelling dialog, click Close.

18 Click ➤ Options.
19 In the Options dialog, click the Spelling tab.
20 Under Settings, click Restore Defaults.
This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration.

21 Under Personal dictionary, click Edit.


The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor.

22 In the text editor, delete sheetmtl-CU.


23 In the text editor, click File menu ➤ Save, and then click File menu ➤ Exit.
24 In the Options dialog, click OK.
25 Close the file without saving it.

Modifying Snap Settings


In this exercise, you modify snap settings. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects
and not saved within a project file. You can turn snap settings on and off, or use the shortcut keys to force
a particular snap method. In this exercise, you modify snap increments, work with snapping turned off, and
use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis.

Modify snap increments

1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project.


2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse.
3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open
Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte.
4 In the New Project dialog, click OK.
5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.
Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. As you zoom in and out
within a view, Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing
area. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it.

6 In the Snaps dialog, under Dimension Snaps, click in the Length dimension snap increments
box following the value 4’ ; and enter 1 ;.

40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects


7 Under Object Snaps, notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option.
You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. For example, if you
want to snap an object to a wall midpoint, enter SM, and only midpoint snaps are recognized
until you commit an action. After you click to place the object at the midpoint, snapping reverts
to the system default settings.

8 In the Snaps dialog, click OK.


9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall.
10 On the Options Bar, deselect Chain.
11 Click in the center of the drawing area, and move the cursor to the right.

Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. If it does not, zoom out until it does
so.
A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. This
dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries.

TIP To zoom while sketching, use the wheel button on your mouse. If you do not have a wheel
button, you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. While sketching, you
can also use the zoom shortcut keys, such as ZO to zoom out.

12 While sketching a generic straight wall, zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment
shifts to 1’.
This is the increment that you added previously.

Sketch without snapping

13 While sketching the wall, enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.

Notice that when snapping is turned off completely, the listening dimension reflects the exact
length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right.

Modifying Snap Settings | 41


14 Click to set the wall endpoint.
15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall, and move the cursor to the right. Do not set
the wall end point.

Notice that snapping is once again active. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping, the
command is only active for one click of the mouse.

Use snapping shortcut keys

16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.


17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall.
18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously.
Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. If you move the cursor along the
wall, it will snap to the endpoints, the midpoint, and the wall edges.

19 Enter SM.
This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints.

20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.

21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.


22 Move the cursor downward, and specify the wall endpoint.
23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.
24 Under Dimension Snaps, click in the Length dimension snap increments box, and delete the
value 1’ ;.
Make sure you also delete the semicolon.

25 Click OK.
26 Close the file, with or without saving it.

42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects


Creating a Mechanical
System

In this tutorial, you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. You also learn how to design
a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

43
44
Planning Mechanical
Systems 4
In this tutorial, you design a mechanical system for an office building. This system consists of a cooling tower, water
source heat pump (WSHP), duct system and a hydronic piping system. As you create the mechanical system, you follow
a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This
workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. By following the recommended workflow,
you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient.
The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. At the end of the
tutorial, you will understand the process, methodology, and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems.

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each exercise is dependent on the
completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is
highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This training file
includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you
use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. You can search this directory to
verify that the training files have been downloaded. If the tutorial training files are not present, go to
http://www.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.

To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP, you first plan the system. In this lesson, you begin planning the system by
placing spaces in the building. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. After
applying a color scheme to the zones, you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and
cooling requirements for the building.

Preparing Spaces
Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. They contain information about the
locations in which they are placed. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. In this
exercise, you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. Because most MEP engineers
work with a linked model during system design, you first configure the linked architectural model, and then
you create a plenum level.

45
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i.rvt.

Configure the linked model for space bounding

The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural
building model. In this section, you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it.

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level
2 - Space Plan is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Place the cursor over the linked model, and after the linked model highlights, click to select it.
The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit
Model.

3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.
4 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding, and click OK.
This makes the architectural components (such as walls, ceilings, and floors) recognized as
boundaries for spaces.

NOTE When working with a linked file, make certain that architectural elements (such as walls, roof,
and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. These components are defined in the architectural training
file, not in the MEP training file.

5 Press Esc to clear the selection.


The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the
space volume. Next, you add a level for plenums.

Add a Plenum level

You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling
and the floor above) of the building. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the
building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.

46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems


6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP - Design ➤ Elevations
(Building Elevation), and double-click West - MEP.
7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level.
8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel, and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector
drop-down.

9 On the Draw panel, click (Line).


10 On the Options Bar:
■ Verify that Make Plan View is selected.

■ Click Plan View Types, and in the Plan View Types dialog, verify that only Floor Plan is
selected, and click OK.
This creates only a floor plan after the level is added.

■ For Offset, enter 8'.

11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows:


■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level.

■ Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line.

12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.


The new level is placed, offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2.

13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view.


14 Double-click the level name (Level 4), and enter Level 2 Plenum.
15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views, click Yes (this will happen every time
you create a new level).
16 Press Esc.

A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation
of a view template), and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level.
A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created, and is listed in the Project
Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. Because you have not yet specified
the view classification or sub-discipline properties, those categories in the Project Browser are
listed as question marks.

Preparing Spaces | 47
Modify plenum properties

17 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans, right-click Level 2
Plenum, and click Properties.
18 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ Under Graphics, for View Scale, verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected.

■ For Sub-Discipline, select MEP - Plenum.

■ For View Classification, select Design.

■ Under Identity Data, for Default View Template, select Plenum Plan.

■ Under Extents, for View Range, click Edit.

■ In the View Range dialog:

■ Under Primary Range, for Top, select Level Above (Level 3), and for Offset, enter 0.

■ For Cut plane, enter an Offset of 1' 0".

■ Under View Depth, for Level, verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified
with an offset of 0.

■ Click OK twice.

The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP - Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project
Browser.

Apply a view template

19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view.


Notice that the site plan displays in the view. You apply the default view template so that only
the architectural floor plan displays.

20 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2 Plenum, and click Apply Default View Template.
The view graphics are modified based on the template applied.

21 Close the file with or without saving it.

NOTE After finishing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly
recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides.
This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training
session.

In this exercise, you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing
spaces. In the next exercise, you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area, and then
place spaces in various types of areas.

Placing Spaces
Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. They contain information about the
locations in which they are placed. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. In this
exercise, you place spaces in areas of the building model.

48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems


Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i.rvt.

Place a space

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level
2 - Space Plan is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor.
3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.
Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically
tool. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model.

4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel, and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector
drop-down.
5 On the Options Bar:
■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.

■ For Upper Limit, select Level 2 Plenum.


This specifies the vertical extent of the space.

■ For Offset, enter 0.

■ For (Tag Location), select Horizontal.

■ Verify that Leader is cleared.

■ For Space, select New.

6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor, walls,
and ceilings).

Placing Spaces | 49
7 Click to place the space.
8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.
9 Select the space, and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties
drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.
10 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ Under Identity Data, for Number, enter 219.

■ For Name, enter Library.


Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the
linked architectural file, ensuring coordination between the files.

■ Click OK.

11 Press Esc to clear the selection.

Prepare the plenum view

12 Open Design ➤ MEP - Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.


The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.

13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden.


14 In the drawing area, double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section
26).

50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems


15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.
Place a space in the plenum

16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it.


17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.
18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.
19 On the Options Bar:
■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.

■ For Upper Limit, select Level 3.

■ For Offset, enter 0.

20 Click in the Library to place the space, and then click Modify.
Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time, demonstrating the
parametric functionality of the software.

21 Using the method learned previously, change the space name to Plenum and the number to
219P.

Placing Spaces | 51
22 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Energy Analysis, select Plenum and verify that Occupiable
is cleared.
23 Click OK.
24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes.

25 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing a Space in an Open Area


In this exercise, you place a space in a large corridor area, and then split the space using a space separation
line. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.

52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems


Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i.rvt.

Place a space in an open area

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Space Plan is highlighted,
indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs.
3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.
4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel, and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector
drop-down.
5 On the Options Bar, for Upper Limit, select Level 3, and for Offset, enter 0.
6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space, and then press Esc.

Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53


7 In the Project Browser, open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule, and scroll to the newly
placed space, which was numbered 219Q.
In the schedule, notice the corresponding architectural room name and number.

8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.


9 In the floor plan, double-click the space name, enter Corridor, and press Enter.
10 Using the same method, change the space number to 216A, and notice that the schedule updates
with the changes.
If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead, the plan view would
have updated with the changes.

11 Close the schedule view, and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view.
12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator.
13 To specify the start point of the separation line, click the endpoint of the lower wall in space
Instruction 221, as shown.

14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line.

54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems


15 Press Esc twice.
Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space.

16 Using the method learned previously, place a space in the lower area of the split space, with an
upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0.
The new space is numbered correctly (216B).

17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.

18 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55


Placing a Multi-Level Space
In this exercise, you place a space in a chase, and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume
of the chase.

Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i.rvt.

Add a multi-level space

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level
2 - Space Plan is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.
Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need
to be placed (empty).

3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section, and place a section in the view as shown:
■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point.

■ Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint.

■ If necessary, click (Flip Section) to reorient the section.

■ Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.

56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems


4 Press Esc.
5 Double-click the section head to open the section view.
6 Enter VG.
7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, expand Spaces, select
Interior and Reference, and then click OK.
8 Enter WT to tile the views.
9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase.
10 In the plan view, add a space:
■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

■ On the Options Bar, for Upper Limit, select Level 3.

■ For Offset, enter 0.

■ In the plan view, click in the chase area to place the space.

11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.


Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view, but that the
space does not fill the entire chase.

12 Click in the section view, select the space, right-click, and click Element Properties.
13 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ Under Constraints, for Upper Limit, select Roof Level.

■ For Limit Offset, enter 4'.


You enter a value that is above the level of the roof.

■ Under Identity Data, for Name, enter Chase.

■ For Number, enter 225PC.

14 Click OK.

Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57


Bounding elements (such as walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs) define the extent of space volume
used in calculations. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element, the space displays
the volume up to the roof only.

15 Press Esc.
Tag spaces

16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 - Space Plan, and maximize the view.
17 Type ZF.
18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.
19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, under Loaded Tags, select Space Tag With Volume, and click
OK.
All spaces in the view are tagged.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.


You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. You used space separation lines to
create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area, and you placed spaces for various types of
areas. In the next exercises, you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform
an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.

58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems


Viewing Zones in the System Browser
After spaces are placed in the building, Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. In this exercise,
you view and verify zones in the System Browser. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and
to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i.rvt.

NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.
Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. To display space reference lines, on the Model Categories tab
of the Visibility/Graphics dialog, under Spaces, click Reference.

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Zoning is
highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.
3 Right-click in the System Browser, click View ➤ Zones, and verify that All Disciplines is selected.
The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. The browser is a hierarchical
list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. Notice that Default is currently
the only zone.

4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model.

NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. After a space is placed
in an area, it is automatically added to the Default zone. The recommended workflow is to add each
space to a zone that you create, which removes the space from the Default zone.

The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( ) or
unoccupiable ( ). You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space.

Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59


5 In the System Browser, double-click 121 Cafeteria.
6 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Energy Analysis, select Occupiable, and click OK.
The graphic in the System Browser updates, indicating that the space is occupiable.
Next, you assign spaces to a zone. As you do this, you will use the System Browser to confirm
that the spaces are in the new zone.

7 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating Zones on a Single Level


In this exercise, you assign spaces to zones in the building, and verify the zones in the System Browser.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i.rvt.

NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.
Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. To display space reference lines, on the Model Categories tab
of the Visibility/Graphics dialog, under Spaces, click Reference.

Assign spaces to a zone

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Zoning is
highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.
The Zone tool is active, the Edit Zone tab displays, and a new zone is created. The new zone is
listed in the System Browser.

NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. You work with a single zone until you
click Finish. Using the Edit Zone tab, you can add or remove a space from the zone, and modify the
zone properties.

3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.


4 In the drawing area, select Computer Lab 222, Instruction 221, and Electrical 220 spaces, and
click Finish Editing Zone.

60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems


In the System Browser, expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab, Instruction,
and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). To view the zone in
the drawing area, you need to activate the zone visibility.

5 With the drawing area active, type VG.


6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog:
■ Under Visibility, select HVAC Zones.

■ Expand HVAC Zones, and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary
and Color Fill).

■ Click OK.

The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. The zone reference line indicates
that the 3 spaces are in the zone.

Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61


TIP After you finish editing the zone, you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better
view the spaces that are in the zone.

Rename the zone

7 Select the zone, and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties.
8 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Name, enter 2 - West - Area B, and
click OK.
The new zone name displays in the System Browser.

9 In the System Browser, expand 2 - West - Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.
10 On the Edit Zone tab, click Finish Editing Zone.
11 Close the System Browser.
12 Close the file with or without saving it.
In this exercise, you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. You activated zone
visibility in the views, and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.

Creating Zones on Multiple Levels


In this exercise, you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building, and verify the zone in the
System Browser.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i.rvt.

NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.
Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. To display space reference lines, on the Model Categories tab
of the Visibility/Graphics dialog, under Spaces, click Reference.

Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Zoning is
highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs).
3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 - Zoning.
4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.

62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems


5 Click in the Level 1 - Zoning view to activate it.
6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.
7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.
8 In the Level 1 - Zoning floor plan, select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.
9 With the Add Space tool active, click in the Level 2 - Zoning view, and add the Lounge 215
space to the zone.
10 Click Finish Editing Zone.

Tag a zone

11 Activate the Level 1 - Zoning view.


12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.
13 On the Options Bar:
■ Verify that Leader is selected.

■ Select Attached End.

■ Verify that the distance is 1/2".

14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.


15 Press Esc, zoom out, and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as
desired.

Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63


The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. Because the heating and cooling loads
calculations have not been performed, the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values.

Rename the zone

16 In the Level 1 - Zoning view, double-click the zone tag.


17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog, for Name Value, enter Lounge - East, and click OK.
18 Press F9 to display the System Browser.
The new zone name displays in the System Browser. You can expand the zone in the System
Browser to view the spaces in it.

19 Close the file with or without saving it.


In this exercise, you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building.

Working with the Analytical Model


In this exercise, you verify the building, space, and zone information, and view graphical representations
of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i.rvt.

Verify building information

1 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans, double-click Level 1 - Zoning to
make it the active view.
2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads.
View a space

3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog, on the ViewCube, click the corner
where the Top, Front, and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown.

64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems


4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane), verify that Wireframe is selected.

NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries.

5 On the Details tab:


■ Expand 1_South_Lounge, and select 109 Lounge.
The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned
to them.

■ Click (Highlight).
The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. Using the Highlight tool, you can verify that
the space boundaries are as you defined them. You can also view a space in relation to the
other spaces or architecture in the entire building.

TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Right-click in the preview pane to access
pan and zoom commands.

■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool.


Next, you isolate the space.

■ With 109 Lounge selected, click (Isolate).


The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. The Isolate tool allows you to verify
one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building
architecture.

Working with the Analytical Model | 65


■ On the Details tab, select 1_South_Lounge.
All spaces in the zone display in isolation.

6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool.


Next, you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of
the space.

Verify space information

7 On the Details tab, select 109 Lounge.


Below the list of spaces and zones, the space information displays for the selected space.

8 Verify the space information:

■ For Space Type, click , and in the Space Type Settings dialog, scroll down in the left
pane, select Lounge/Recreation, and click OK.
Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. You can use the Space Type Settings
dialog to adjust settings as necessary.

■ For Construction Type, verify that <Building> is selected.


These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space.

■ For People, click , and in the People dialog, verify that <Default> is selected for
Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person), and then click OK.
This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space.

■ For Electrical Loads, click , and in the Electrical Loads dialog, verify that <Default> is
selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values, and then click OK.
This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space.

Next, you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of
the zone.

66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems


Verify zone information

9 Select 1_South_Lounge.
Below the list of spaces and zones, the zone information displays for the selected zone.

10 Verify the zone information:


■ For Service Type, verify that <Building> is selected.

■ For Heating Information, verify that 70.00 °F : 90.00 °F : N/A is specified.


This indicates the heating set point, heating air temperature, and humidification set point.

■ For Cooling Information, verify that 74.00 °F : 54.00 °F : N/A is specified.


This indicates the cooling set point, cooling air temperature, and dehumidification set point.

NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point,
you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. This is usually preferable to indicating
a particular percentage for those parameters.

■ For Outdoor Air Information, verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified.
This indicates the outdoor air per person, outdoor air per area, and air changes per hour.

Next, you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids.

View the shaded model

11 On the View Selector, click (Shading).

NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces
of walls, floors, roofs, and other room-bounding components.

12 Using the methods learned previously, highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view
its inner volume.

13 Deactivate the Isolate tool, and zoom to the corner of the building as shown.

Working with the Analytical Model | 67


Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space.

Add a space to fill a void

14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog, click Cancel.


15 In the Project Browser, open MEP - Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.
16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.
17 On the Options Bar:
■ For Upper Limit, select Level 3.

■ For Offset, enter 0.

18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space, and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection
panel ➤ Modify.
Modify space properties

19 Select the space, and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties
drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.
20 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ Under Identity Data, for Number, enter 212P.

■ For Name, select Plenum.

■ Under Energy Analysis, notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled.
Because this is an unoccupied space, it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling
loads analysis.

■ Under Energy Analysis, select Plenum.


Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned.

■ Click OK.

Add the plenum space to a zone

21 In the drawing area, select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum).

68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems


22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone.
23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space, and select space Plenum 212P.
24 Click Finish Editing Zone.
25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog, and verify that the space has replaced the void.
26 Close the file with or without saving it.
In this exercise, you verified building, space, and zone information, and viewed the spaces in the preview
pane to verify space boundaries and volumes.

Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads


In this exercise, you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling, and you perform a heating and
cooling loads analysis. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and
cooling demands of the building.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i.rvt.

Specify project settings

1 In the Project Browser, under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans, double-click
Level 2 - Space Plan.
2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information.
3 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Energy Analysis, for Energy Data, click Edit.
4 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ For Building Type, select School or University.

■ For Postal Code, enter 03101.

■ For Location, click in the Value field, and then click .

■ In the Manage Place and Locations dialog:


■ On the Place tab, for City, verify that Manchester, NH, is selected.

■ Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes.

Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69


When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time, this option adjusts
the times automatically.

■ On the Weather tab, verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is
selected, and click OK.

■ In the Type Properties dialog, for Building Service, verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is
specified.

■ For Building Construction, verify that <Building> is specified.

■ For Ground Plane, verify that Level 1 is selected.

■ For Project Phase, verify that New Construction is selected.

■ For Sliver Space Tolerance, verify that 1' 0" is specified.

■ For Export Complexity, verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected.

■ Click OK twice.

Verify area and volume setting

5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations.
6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog, under Volume
Computations, verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting), and click OK.

NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and
cooling loads analysis. If, after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool, you receive a message
that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate,
you need to select this option.

7 Zoom in to the center area of the building.


8 In the drawing area, select space Library 219, right-click, and click Element Properties.
In order to select a space, first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display,
and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.

9 In the Instance Properties dialog:


■ Under Energy Analysis, verify that Occupiable is selected.

■ For Condition Type, select Heated and cooled.


This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load, a cooling
load, both, or neither.

■ For Space Type, click in the Value column, and then click .

■ In the Space Type Settings dialog, select Library - Audio Visual, and click OK.

■ For People, click Edit.

■ In the People dialog:


■ Under Occupancy, for Values, select Specified.

■ Select Area per person, and enter 50 sq. ft.

■ Under Heat Gain (per Person), for Values, select Specified.

■ For Sensible, enter 200 Btu/h.

■ For Latent, enter 150 Btu/h.

70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems


■ Click OK.

■ For Electrical Loads, click Edit.

■ In the Electrical Loads dialog:


■ Under Lighting, for Values, select Actual.

■ Under Power, for Values, select Actual.

■ Click OK twice.

10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads.
11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog, verify the settings specified earlier:
■ For Building Type, verify that School or University is selected.

■ For Location, verify that Manchester, NH, is specified.

■ For Building Service, verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected.

■ For Building Construction, verify that <Building> is specified.

You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking (opens the
Building Construction dialog).

IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects
the heating and cooling loads analysis. Revit MEP stores this information as project information.

You have verified the building information. Next, you view the space and zone volumes in the
building model.

12 Click the Details tab.

If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building, it should be corrected before you

calculate loads. Select the space associated with the warning, and click to learn the cause
for the warning. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog,
click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. You should correct the space error in the
building model, and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations.
There should be no warnings displayed.

13 Under 2_Middle_Library, select 219 Library.


The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays, and
can be modified here.

■ Select 2_Middle_Library, and under Heating Information, click (Zone Heating


Information).

■ In the Heating Information dialog, verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F , and click OK.

Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis

14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog, click Calculate.


Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP
performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. See Help for more information about the
integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods.

Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71


After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed, the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog
closes, and a loads report displays.

15 Review the loads report for project, weather, space, and zone information for the building model.

NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building,
space, or zone information, or make any changes to the model, otherwise the loads report or schedules
will not reflect your changes.

16 After you review the loads report, you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment
usage in the building.

TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports.

17 In the loads report, under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library, click the blue hyperlink for
219 Library.
You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review.

18 Close the report and activate Level 2 - Space Plan.


19 In the drawing area, select 219 Library, and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element
panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.
20 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Energy Analysis, review the Calculated Loads and Design
Loads. Notice that the space information was automatically updated.
21 Click OK.
22 Close the file with or without saving it.
In this exercise, you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads
report.

Creating a Zone Color Scheme


In this exercise, you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. A color scheme allows you to
communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing
element properties.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i.rvt.

Assign a color scheme to a zone

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level
1 - Zoning Load Fill is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend.
3 In the drawing area, click to the right of the building to place the legend.
4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ For Space Type, select HVAC Zones.

■ For Color Scheme, verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected.

■ Click OK.

72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems


5 Zoom in to the legend.
Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value, in 1-ton increments. You want a scheme
that allows for a greater tonnage range.

Select a different color scheme legend

6 In the drawing area, select the color scheme legend.


7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.
8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, under Schemes, select Tonnage Range, and click OK.
The new scheme displays in the view.

Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73


The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values.

9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.


The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.

Apply a color scheme to a section view

10 In the Project Browser, open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.
11 Using the method learned previously, add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC
zones of the section view.

74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems


12 Close the file with or without saving it.
In this exercise, you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. In the next exercise, you create
a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system.

Creating an Airflow Schedule


In this exercise, you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Instead of placing this schedule on
sheets as a construction document, you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of
airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. You then use the schedule to adjust the air
terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i.rvt.

Define the schedule

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 - Space Fill is the
active view.
2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.
3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ Under Category, select Spaces.
If you select Show categories from all disciplines, more category options are available.

■ For Name, enter Space Airflow Schedule.

■ Select Schedule building components.

■ For Phase, select New Construction.

■ Click OK.

Specify schedule properties

4 In the Schedule Properties dialog:


■ At the bottom left of the dialog, for Select available fields from, select Spaces.

Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75


■ Under Available fields, double-click:
■ Level

■ Number

■ Name

■ Calculated Supply Airflow

■ Actual Supply Airflow


The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section.

■ Click Calculated Value.

Define the airflow delta formula

5 In the Calculated Value dialog:


■ For Name, enter Airflow Delta.

■ Select Formula.

■ For Discipline, select HVAC.

■ For Type, select Air Flow.

■ For Formula, click (Browse).

■ In the Fields dialog, select Calculated Supply Airflow, and click OK.

■ In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, enter - (minus sign) after Calculated Supply

Airflow, and then click .

■ Using the method learned previously, add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula.

■ Click OK.
In the Schedule Properties dialog, the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under
Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule.

Specify additional schedule properties

■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab:


■ For Sort by, select Level.

■ Select Ascending, Header, and Blank line.

■ For Then by, select Number.

■ On the Formatting tab:


■ For Fields, select Level, and then select Hidden field.

■ For Fields, select Airflow Delta, and then click Conditional Format.
You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated
and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range.

Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta

■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog:


■ For Test, select Not Between.

76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems


■ For Value, enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM.

■ For Background Color, click the color swatch.

■ In the Color dialog, select red, and click OK.


Under Conditions to Use, notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside
the range of -25 to 25 CFM.

■ Click OK twice.

The schedule displays, and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet.
Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text, right-click
to access schedule properties, or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. When you select a
field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model, a view
opens that contains the selected space.

6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel, verify
that Show is highlighted.
Because no air terminals have been placed in the model, all the Actual Supply Airflow values
are 0, and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. In later exercises, you use the
airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow.

7 Close the file with or without saving it.


In this exercise, you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is
in an unacceptable range, the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. This concludes the
planning stage of the systems project. In the next lesson, you begin the designing phase by placing air
terminals in the spaces.

Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77


78
Designing Mechanical Air
Systems 5
Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. In this lesson, you will create supply air
systems. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump
(WSHP). Then, you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air
systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. After system creation, you size ductwork and validate
your air system design.

IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting
Designing Piping Systems. After completing the air systems lesson, you will have been introduced to concepts and
practices that you will use to design the piping systems.

Placing Hosted Air Terminals


In this exercise, you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. As you place the air terminals, you modify
air terminal parameters, learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan, and work with
the airflow schedule.

79
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i.rvt.

Prepare the design views

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Ceiling
Plans ➤ Level 2 - HVAC Ceiling is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows
panel ➤ Tile.
3 In the ceiling view, zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.
When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip
and status bar display the space name.

4 Click in the schedule view to make it active, and scroll to space 223.
5 Select space 223 in the schedule, and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well.

80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems


Add a supply air terminal

6 Click in Level 2 - HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view.


7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.
8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel, and select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face
Round Neck - Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck - Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down.
9 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face.
10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space, as shown.

NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host, which in this case is the ceiling grid.
If the host element is modified or moved, the hosted elements are updated as well.

11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.
Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal
is placed. Also, the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly.

Modify the supply diffuser flow

12 In the ceiling plan, select the diffuser.


13 On the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 425 CFM, and press Enter.
The schedule updates with the new flow data.

Copy the supply diffuser

14 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.
15 On the Options Bar, verify that Constrain is cleared, and then select both Copy and Multiple.
Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool
after each placement.

16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point.
17 Move the cursor down, type 12, and press Enter.
18 Repeat to add a third diffuser.
19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown, and then press Esc to end the command.

Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81


Tag diffusers

20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.


21 On the Options Bar, clear Leader.
22 In the drawing area, select one of the diffusers.
If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object, you load one from the library as
follows:

23 In the alert dialog, click Yes.


24 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag.rfa,
and click Open.
25 In the drawing area, select each of the 5 supply diffusers, and then press Esc.
Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM, and the airflow delta value is within acceptable
range.

Place return diffusers

26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.


27 Select Return Diffuser - Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector
drop-down.
28 On the Placement tab, click Place on Face.
29 Place 2 diffusers, as shown.
As you place the return diffusers, notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser
to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. Next, you edit the
return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines.

82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems


Edit the diffuser family

30 In the drawing area, select one of the return diffusers, and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family
panel ➤ Edit Family.
31 In the alert dialog, click Yes.
32 In the Project Browser, open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. Level.
33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines, press Tab to highlight the chain of lines, as shown, and
click to select the lines.

34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties.


35 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Reference, select Strong Reference, and click
OK.
You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines
of the ceiling grid.

36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.

Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83


37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values.
Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid

38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge.
39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.
40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser.


42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650
CFM310 CFM, and press Enter.
Modify the airflow display arrows

45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties.
46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems


47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals


In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air
terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85


Add non-hosted air terminals

1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC
Plan - Design to make it the active view.
2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0".
3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building.
When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip
and status bar display the space name.

4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden.


5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile.
6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view.
7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.
8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck.
9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected.
10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place
Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser.
Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed.

NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed
in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in
the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your
components may be numbered differently than those in the training files.

11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties
drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.
12 Modify the diffuser properties:
■ In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'.
Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of
the diffuser from the level.

■ Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM.

■ Click OK.

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems


13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.
14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press
Enter.
15 Press Esc.
By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser.
Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87


Tag existing diffusers

17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.


18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader.
19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc.
Create an embedded schedule

You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and
flow) for individual diffusers in each space.
20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in
the schedule, and click View Properties.
21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit.
22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ Select Embedded Schedule.

■ For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System
Type, Type, Mark, and Flow.
24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark.
25 Click OK 3 times.
The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space.
Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you
modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the
increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems


Modify an airflow value in the schedule

You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow.


26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows.
27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110.
28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press
Enter.
29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM.
Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are
modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source
is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89


Place air handling equipment

30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design.
31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115.
As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re
selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the
zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated
Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton
(approximately 1.5 times the heating load).
33 Click OK.
34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.
35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right
Discharge : 4 Tons.
36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115.
37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and
the return faces away from the space.
38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway.
39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems


40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump.
41 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Constraints ➤ Offset, enter 9' 0"2750, and click OK.
42 Press Esc to clear the selection.
Verify equipment mounting heights

43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.


44 Zoom in to space 115, and verify the height of the WSHP:
■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References.

■ For the start point, click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP.

■ For the end point, click the Level 1 line.

■ Verify that the measured distance is 9'.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91


Press Esc.
45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems


In this exercise, you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. A Revit MEP system is the logical
connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. This logical
connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses, including energy analysis. You create air systems
by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. You then create the logical connection between the
system components. After creating the logical connection, you then create ductwork to physically connect
the system components. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.
In this exercise, you also use the System Browser to validate systems.

IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections, physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing.
However, they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry.

Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i.rvt.

Explore the System Browser

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - HVAC
Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building.
When you highlight a space, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar
display the space name.

3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.


4 If the System Browser title is Zones, right-click the title, and click View ➤ Systems.
5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed.

92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems


IMPORTANT In the System Browser, all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy.
All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the
Unassigned folder. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed,
Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. As you add diffusers to systems, the
assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder.

6 Keep the System Browser open, and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays
horizontally below the floor plan.
Create a secondary air system

7 In the drawing area, select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223.
Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout, Connect Into, and Create
Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. These tools vary depending on the equipment
used to create a system.

8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply.


Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser.

9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.
10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System.
Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using
the Add To System tool.

11 In the drawing area, select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled.
On the Options Bar, the number of elements is updated.

12 In the System Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1.
13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties.
14 In the Instance Properties dialog, review the Number of Elements, System Name, and Flow value.
Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers
you added to the system.

15 Click Cancel.
16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System, and then select the last
supply diffuser in space 223.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93


17 Using the method learned previously, access system properties to see that the flow value (2125
CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser.
18 Click OK.
19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment, and then select the
WSHP (located outside the space).

NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the
WSHP is the parent, the air terminals are the children, and the system connects them.

Rename the system

Next, you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties, which
updates the name in the System Browser.

20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties.
21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Mark, highlight the value (WSHP
2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it.
22 Click OK.
23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties.
24 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for System Name, highlight the value and
click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection.
25 Click OK.
The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser.

26 Click Finish Editing System.


27 Close the file with or without saving it.
In this exercise, you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. You used the Create
Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems


In this exercise, you create ductwork to physically connect system components. This workflow is the Revit
MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. In this exercise, you also use the System Browser to
validate systems.

94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems


Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i.rvt.

Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor
Plans ➤ Level 2 - HVAC Plan- Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.
When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip
and status bar display the space name.

3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed, click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser
to display it.
4 In the drawing area, select the upper left diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals
tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.
A Generate Layout tab displays, which provides various layout tools. Also, the software recognizes
the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. Lines indicate
the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).

5 On the Options Bar, for Solution Type, select Network.


In this case, the Network type provides several solutions, each with branches off the main duct
at 90-degree angles.

6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions,
and display solution 1.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95


7 On the Options Bar, click Settings.
8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog:
■ Select Main.

■ For Duct Type, select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.

■ For Offset, enter 9' 10 1/2".

■ Select Branch.

■ For Duct Type, select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.

■ For Offset, enter 9' 10 1/2".

■ For Flex Duct Type, select Flex Duct Round : Flex - Round.

■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length, enter 3'.

■ Click OK.

9 On the Generate Layout panel, click Modify.


10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct, and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of
the lighting fixtures, as shown.

WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. If there is not enough
room for the software to create the necessary fittings, you’ll get an error in a later step.

96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems


11 Click Finish Layout.

NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout
or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space
to be created, or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components, select a
different layout solution, or manually modify the duct. Remember to always check duct connectivity
after modification.

The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. All fittings required to connect the duct system to
system components are automatically added. For example, a transition connecting the elbow
is automatically added, as is the elbow itself.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97


NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. The ductwork is a physical (not
a logical) connection, thus it is not part of the system. You can delete ductwork and the system
remains.

Add a color scheme legend

12 In the drawing area, highlight a segment of the main duct, press Tab twice to highlight the
entire system, and click to select it.

NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected, you check connectivity by moving the cursor
over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. The first time you press Tab,
the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire
network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Press Tab a third time to
highlight the entire network of connected ducts, fittings, and equipment. If the entire network does
not highlight, a disconnection exists. This disconnection will be located at the point where the
highlighting stops. Usually, you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point
away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Typically the
disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection.

13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend.


14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend.
15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, for Color Scheme, select Duct Color Fill - Flow, and click
OK.
Using a flow-based color scheme, you can verify connectivity as you create a system.

Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme, but not all values are
used in this view.

Modify the legend display

16 Select the color scheme legend, and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element
panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.
17 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Values Displayed, select By View, and then
click OK.

98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems


The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view.

Modify flow values

18 In the drawing area, select the WSHP, and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element
panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.
19 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical - Airflow, note the Air Flow value (2125
CFM), and click OK.
20 In the drawing area, select one of the diffusers in the system, and on the Options Bar, for Flow,
decrease the flow value by 100 CFM, and press Enter.
Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated.

21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP, and notice that the flow value has updated with
the change.
The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals.

22 Close the Instance Properties dialog.


Edit color scheme

23 In the drawing area, select the color scheme legend.


24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.
25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, for Schemes, select Duct Color Fill - Velocity.
Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through
the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity.

26 Click OK, and then press Esc to clear the selection.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99


Calculate duct sizes

27 In the drawing area, highlight a segment of the duct, press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire
system (including the WSHP), and then click to select it.
28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.
29 In the Duct Sizing dialog:
■ Under Sizing Method, select Friction, and enter .08 in-wg/100ft.

■ Select Only.

■ Under Constraints, for Branch Sizing, select Calculated Size Only.

■ Select Restrict Height, and select 16".

■ Click OK.

If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings, you need to
modify the layout:
■ In the warning dialog, click Cancel.

■ Select the upper segment of main duct, and drag it to the right.

■ Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it.

The ductwork and fittings are updated. The flow information graphically represents the properties
of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system.

100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems


Inspect the system

The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow, pressure,
and pressure loss. Using this tool, you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them.
The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the
System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Ductwork and system components must
be connected to a system (logical connection), and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection).
30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system.
31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.
Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab.

32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.


33 Move the cursor over the system components.
Use the information that displays (flow, static pressure, and pressure loss) to find deficiencies
in the system, so that you can modify the system design accordingly.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101


NOTE As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure.
Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also
known as the critical path.

34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.

35 Click Finish.
36 Close the file with or without saving it.

Manually Creating Ductwork


In this exercise, you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components
to the existing air system. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct.

Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i.rvt.

102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems


Manually create main duct line

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor
Plans ➤ Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner, and select the WSHP.
3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors), and click
Draw Duct.
4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel, and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled
Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.
5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.
6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main
duct.

7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers, and click to specify the end of the main
duct.

Manually Creating Ductwork | 103


8 Press Esc twice to end the command.
Create branch duct lines

9 To begin branch duct, select the top right diffuser, right-click the connector grip, and click Draw
Duct.

NOTE When drawing duct, use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector.

10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.
11 On the Options Bar, for Offset, select 9' 10 1/2".
The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified
offset height.

12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct.

13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.


Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool

The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system.

14 In the Project Browser, double-click MEP - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 - 3D MEP.


15 On the ViewCube, click the corner where the Top, Front, and Left sides converge in order to
orient the view as shown.
Click this corner

Resulting view orientation

104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems


16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115.
17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D.
18 Make the floor plan the active view.
19 In the drawing area, in space 115, select the top unconnected supply diffuser.

20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.


21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into.
The ductwork is automatically created, and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser.
Also, the color fill indicates the flow value. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser
and the connector into the main duct), it is considered a closed loop.

22 Using the same method, connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct.

Manually Creating Ductwork | 105


Branch ductwork in 2D

Convert duct to flex duct

23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct, and select the top left diffuser.
A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that
the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings
dialog. You can ignore the warning.

24 Select the remaining diffusers.


25 Press Esc.
Branch ductwork in 3D

Add an endcap

26 In the plan view, zoom in to the open end of the main duct.

106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems


To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations, you
need to add an endcap to create a closed loop.

27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting.


28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.
29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct.

30 Press Esc twice.


Endcap in 3D

Split and size main duct

31 Maximize the plan view.


32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split.
33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown, and then click Modify.

Size ductwork

34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split), press Tab to highlight the entire main
duct run, and click to select it.

Manually Creating Ductwork | 107


35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.
36 In the Duct Sizing dialog, under Constraints, clear Restrict Height, and click OK.
This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space, such as a plenum.

37 Press Esc to clear the selection.


The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system.

Verify duct sizing

38 In the drawing area, select a segment of the main duct, and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element
panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.
39 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, verify that the value is
the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct, and then click OK.
40 Using the same method, verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct.
41 Close the file with or without saving it.

108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems


Designing a Mechanical
Piping System 6
In this lesson, you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. You
begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Then,
you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components, including 2 base mounted
pumps, additional water source heat pumps from level 1, and a cooling tower located on the roof. This system is modeled
to accommodate full system flow through a boiler, using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during
cooling mode, or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode.
In this lesson, you learn to:

■ Place mechanical equipment.


■ Create return and supply piping systems.
■ Use the System Browser to review the piping systems.
■ Automatically and manually lay out piping.
■ Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating.
■ Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing.
■ Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections.

109
Level 3 mechanical piping system

Adding Mechanical Equipment


In this exercise, you place mechanical equipment, including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a
condensing boiler, on level 3 of the building model.

Training File

■ Click ➤ Open.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i.rvt.

110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


Adding air side equipment

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor
Plans ➤ Level 3 - HVAC Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.


4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select WSHP - Horizontal - High
Efficiency - 2-6 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.
5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component, and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building,
in corridor 328, as shown.

NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view, you can identify a space by placing the
cursor over the space component. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window)
confirm the space name and number.

6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.


7 On the Options Bar, verify that Wall faces is selected.

Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111


8 Click the corridor wall face, click the top edge of the WSHP, and click to place the dimension,
as shown.

9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.


10 Select the WSHP, click the dimension, and enter 2'.

11 Press Enter and then press Esc.

12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment, and in the Type Selector, verify
that the WSHP is still selected.
13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed, as shown. (Use the alignment sketch
graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.)

112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


14 Click Modify.
Modify WSHP parameters

15 While pressing Ctrl, select the 2 WSHPs, and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element
panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

16 In the Instance Properties dialog:


■ Under Constraints, for Offset, enter 9'.

■ Under Mechanical, for Water Flow, enter 12 GPM.

■ Click OK.

17 Press Esc to clear the selection.


Add water side equipment

18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.


19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select Condensing Boiler : 500
MBH from the Type Selector drop-down.
20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component, and click to place it in the mechanical room,
above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump, as shown.

Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113


21 Click Modify.

22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Piping System


In this exercise, you create the return and supply piping systems, and use the System Browser to review and
confirm the systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source
heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses,
including flow and pressure. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to:

■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components.

■ Create the logical connection between the system components.

■ Create pipes to physically connect the system components.

114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default
system. Unlike logical connections (systems), physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation.
You can create pipes to connect system components, but without a corresponding system, analyses cannot be
performed.

Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower

Training File

■ Click ➤ Open.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i.rvt.

Explore the System Browser

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor
Plans ➤ Level 3 - HVAC Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space - Mech 330).
3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.
4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window, and drag the window down so it displays
along the bottom of the screen, where it is easier to review the information.
5 In the System Browser, right-click the Systems column heading, and click View ➤ Piping.
This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.

6 Expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default
Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.

Creating a Piping System | 115


In the System Browser, all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according
to the system that you assigned to them. You assign a system component to a system either by:
■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components.

■ Assigning a system component to an existing system.

After you placed the WSHPs and boiler, Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default
Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned
folder. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. As you
assign equipment to systems, the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the
respective assigned system folder.

IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a
default system. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads
calculations. Therefore, leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder
performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned.

Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.

Create the hydronic return piping system

7 In the drawing area, while pressing Ctrl, select the 2 WSHPs.


8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return.
A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. This display indicates that the system
is selected. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.

9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area, and the Edit System tool is not active, select one of
the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping
Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.

10 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return.
11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.
12 In the drawing area, select the boiler.
Notice that on the Options Bar, the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH.

116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


13 Click Finish Editing System.
You have created the hydronic return system.

Create the hydronic supply piping system

14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously.


15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.
Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already
has a hydronic return system assigned to it. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the
Return System properties.)

16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.
17 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.
18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System, and select the second
WSHP to add it to the supply system.

19 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, double-click Roof - HVAC
Plan - Design.
20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.
21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building, and select the cooling tower.

Creating a Piping System | 117


22 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water
Supply In, and click OK.
Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements.

23 Close the roof plan view.


24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.
25 Select the boiler.
You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. The boiler is the only equipment
that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). In
heating mode, the boiler supplies heated water to the system, and bypasses the cooling tower.
In cooling mode, the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system; the water returns
through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs.

26 Click Finish Editing System.

IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic
Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH.

Confirm and validate the systems

27 In the System Browser, right-click the Hydronic Supply system category, and click Expand All.
28 Using the same method, expand the Hydronic Return system category.
You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent)
with the WSHPs (children).

29 Right-click CHWS, and click Select.


The hydronic supply system highlights in red, indicating the logical connection. The CHWS
system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower.

118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


In the System Browser, you can view several parameters, including the flow rate and size of the
component.

30 Right-click the Systems column heading, and click Column Settings.


You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser.

31 In the Column Settings dialog, expand Piping, select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature, and
click OK.
32 In the System Browser, right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system,
and click Properties.
33 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for Water Flow, enter 18 GPM, and click
OK.
The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser.

34 Close the file with or without saving it.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout


In this exercise, you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate
Layout tool. You also manually modify the layout path as required.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119


Training File

■ Click ➤ Open.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i.rvt.

Select components with the Filter tool

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor
Plans ➤ Level 3 - HVAC Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner, drag the cursor to the lower right corner
to draw a selection box around the floor plan.
Notice that all components within the Level 3 - HVAC plan view range are highlighted.

3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space - Mech 330).


4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.
5 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Mechanical Equipment, and click OK.
The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs), the boiler, and the 2 base mounted pumps are
selected (and display in red). When you draw a box to select components, you are selecting all
components within the view range of the active view.

TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering, you can place the cursor over a system
component, press Tab to highlight the system, and click to select it.

6 Press Esc to clear the selection.


You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps.

Create the Level 3 return pipe layout

7 Select a WSHP.
8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.
A system preview displays in red.

IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout, and the selected system
components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system
connectors), then the Select a System dialog displays. You select a system in the dialog to view it in
the drawing, and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system.

9 In the Select a System dialog, select CHWR.


10 Click OK.
Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. The layout path solutions display
with the main in blue and the branch in green.

120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


11 On the Options Bar, click Settings.
In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at
which the piping will automatically be created. You can modify this value for the main and
branch elevations.

IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the
main and other obstacles. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes, duct,
structural beams, or architectural components.

12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the
Branch is 10' 0''.
13 Click Cancel.
14 On the Generate Layout tab, verify that Solutions is selected.
15 On the Options Bar:
■ For Solution Type, select Perimeter.
The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors
of the selected system components. It does not reference the architecture.

■ For Inset, enter 1' 6''.

■ Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121


16 Click Finish Layout.
The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that
all of the piping segments are connected to equipment.

17 Optionally, to display the path with thinner lines, click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin
Lines.

18 Place the cursor over the piping, and press Tab 3 times. With each Tab, the Status Bar displays
the components being highlighted:
■ Branch in a pipe network.

■ Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects.

■ Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment.

View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed.

Verify the flow

In a previous exercise, you modified the flow value for the WSHPs; the flow for one WSHP is 18, and the
flow for the other is 12.
19 In the drawing area, select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler.

122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs.

20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.
21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM,
and click OK.
This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM).

22 Select the boiler, and access its instance properties.

23 Under Mechanical, notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM, and click OK.
The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler.

24 Press Esc.
Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system

25 Select the WSHP on the left.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123


26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and verify that CHWR is selected from the
System Selector drop-down.
27 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System.
28 In the Project Browser, under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans,
double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design, and zoom to fit the drawing in the view.
29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.
30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.
On the Options Bar, the Number of Elements is now 8. Logically, the Level 1 WSHPs are
connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).

31 Close the Level 1 plan view.


32 Click Finish Editing System.
Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs

Previously, you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. Next, you physically close the CHWR
loop, which propagates flow throughout the system.
33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.

124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe.

35 Using the drag control, extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the
existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap, as shown.
The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.

Verify the flow from the lower level

36 With the new pipe selected, access its instance properties.


37 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM,
and click Cancel.
38 Using the same method, review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value
is 125 GPM, and then close the Instance Properties dialog.
The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM, and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM,
so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly.

Manually modify piping in layout mode

39 In the drawing area, select a WSHP, and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout
panel ➤ Generate Layout.

NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial, the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the
chilled water supply system (CHWS).

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125


40 In the Select a System dialog, select CHWS.

41 Click OK.
42 On the Options Bar:
■ For Solution Type, select Perimeter 1 of 5.

■ For Slope, enter 0''/12''.

■ For Inset, enter 1' 6''.


The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component.

■ Click Settings.

■ In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch
Offset, and then click OK.

43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove.


44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution.

45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above.

126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. In a later exercise, you
connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.

46 Click Modify.

47 In the drawing area, select the right vertical green sketch line in the path, as shown.

48 While pressing Ctrl, select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. (Both
sections are at the same elevation.)

49 Select the 4-way arrow control, and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the
underlay), as shown.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127


50 Using the same method, select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the
same location as the short segment of pipe), and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch
lines you just moved.

51 Click Finish Layout.

NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting
a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space
to create the pipe, or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components, select a
different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity
after modification.

52 Close the file with or without saving it.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout


In this exercise, you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. You tile a plan view and a 3D
view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. To create the
piping system, you:

■ Connect the boiler to the return piping.

■ Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system.

■ Add piping to close the supply loop.

■ Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop.

128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project
in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. As you work in the training file, you will notice that the supply pipes are
dark purple, and the return pipes are magenta.

Training File

■ Click ➤ Open.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i.rvt.

Tile the views

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor
Plans ➤ Level 3 - HVAC Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Under Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D HVAC Building.
3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.
4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections
on the boiler, as shown.
Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. You may
find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129


Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping

5 In the 3D view, draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe
connecting into the boiler return connector.

6 Press Delete.

7 In the plan view, select the section of piping, as shown.

130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


8 Move the piping:
■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.

■ Click to specify the reference point.

■ Move the cursor up 4''.

■ Click to move the piping, and press Esc to clear the selection.

9 In the 3D view, select the boiler.


10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131


You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the
component and the existing system. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.

11 In the Select Connector dialog, click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water
In, and click OK.
12 In the 3D view, select the return pipe riser.

The connections are automatically created, and the boiler is connected to the return piping.
Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful, flow will propagate
through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector
to which it is connected.
Plan view of return piping connection to the
boiler

Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler

Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is
primary, and the lower one is secondary. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the
boiler to the 2 pumps.
13 In the plan view, select the boiler.
14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top), and click Draw Pipe.

132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


In a plan view, if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping, and you select
1 connector, the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the
supply connector.

15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector
drop-down.
16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector.
17 Draw the piping:
■ Move the cursor to the right, enter 2', and press Enter.
You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments.

■ On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 1' - 7''.

■ Add another 2' section of pipe to the right.

■ Move the cursor down, and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted
pump.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133


NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a
specified range. As you place piping runs that are close together, it may be helpful to switch
Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections.

18 Press Esc twice.


Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down.

19 In the plan view, select the primary base mounted pump.


20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.
21 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3'', and click OK.
22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew.
The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump, and the appropriate fittings
are created.

Upgrade a fitting

23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting, and select it, as shown.

134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee.

NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow, you select the tee fitting, and click the minus
symbol.

Connect the secondary base mounted pump

25 Select the tee fitting, right-click the bottom connector, and click Draw Pipe.
26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of
the base mounted pump, and click to draw the pipe.

27 Move the cursor to the right, and when the connector point displays, click to connect to the
pump.

28 Press Esc.
29 If necessary, zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135


Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel

30 In the plan view, select the primary base mounted pump, right-click the discharge connector,
and click Draw Pipe.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 4'.


32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump,
and click to create the pipe.

33 Press Esc.

136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps; these pipe
connections were created automatically.
3D view of parallel-connected base mounted
pumps

Add pipe to create a closed loop system

34 In the 3D view, zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump, as
shown.

35 Using the method learned previously, upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137


36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return:
■ In the plan view, select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump, right-click
the bottom control on the tee, and click Draw Pipe.

■ Move the cursor down, type 1', and press Enter.

■ On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 9' 6''.

■ Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection
and vertical with the pipe shown, and click to create the pipe.

138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


37 Click Modify.
You now have a closed loop system. Next, you validate the flow through the system.

Validate flow propagation through the supply system

38 In the plan view, select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe,
right-click, and click Element Properties.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139


39 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, notice that Flow is 125 GPM.
The flow is being propagated through the piping.

40 Click Cancel.
41 Using the same method, view the properties for the secondary pump.
In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter
that is .50 or 50% of the Flow, which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM).
The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. When you create the pumps in parallel,
you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%.

42 Click OK.
43 Press Esc.
Connect the cooling tower

Next, you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow.
44 In the 3D view, select the cooling tower, right-click, and click Element Properties.
45 In the Instance Properties dialog, notice that under Mechanical, for Cooling Water Flow, the
value is 0 GPM, and click OK.
Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the
hydronic piping system.

46 Press Esc.
47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements.
The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors.

48 In the plan view, select the following pipes:


■ Supply pipe, as shown.

■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet).

140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


■ Lower pipe (outlet).

Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.

49 Press Esc.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141


50 In the 3D View, select the cooling tower, and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate
that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.
51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM, and close the dialog.
52 Close the file with or without saving it.

Adding Valves
In this exercise, you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. You add
a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). When the valve is open,
the water bypasses the cooling tower, and is heated by the boiler. You also add shut-off valves to control
the flow to and from the cooling tower.

Training File

■ Click ➤ Open.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i.rvt.

142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor
Plans ➤ Level 3 - HVAC Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.
3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower, as
shown.

4 On the Options Bar, verify that the Diameter value is 3''.


5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.
6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel, and select Ball Valve - 2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from
the Type Selector drop-down.

NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. The bypass valve is closed by default.

7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.

8 Press Esc twice.

Rotate the valve

9 Select the valve, and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.

Adding Valves | 143


10 Press Esc.

Place shut-off valves

11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.


12 Select Ball Valve - 2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down.
13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.

14 Using the same method, place another Ball Valve - 2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe
for the cooling tower, parallel to the previously placed valve.

15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


Rotate both valves

16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown.

Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system

17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve, right-click, and click Element Properties.

18 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, verify that Flow is 0 GPM, and click OK.
19 Using the same method, validate the following flow values:
■ For the pipe below the bypass valve, validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM.

■ For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower), validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.

■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower), validate that the Flow is 125
GPM.

Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower

Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the
system to alternately run in heating mode. In heating mode, you want to shut off the flow of water into the
cooling tower. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.
20 Select the bypass valve, and select Ball Valve - 2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.
(This valve allows the water to flow through it.)
21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position), and select Ball Valve - 2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from
the Type Selector drop-down.

Adding Valves | 145


22 Using the method you just learned, validate the following:
■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM.

■ The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM.

■ The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM.

23 Close the file with or without saving it.

Sizing Pipe
In this exercise, you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. Initially, you use the pipe
color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. The
color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. You then use a combination
of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.

Training File

■ Click ➤ Open.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i.rvt.

Display the pipe color scheme legend

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor
Plans ➤ Level 3 - HVAC Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.
3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system, as shown.

146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, select Pipe Color Fill - Flow, and click OK.
This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values.

5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as
expected.

Display the color fill based on pipe size

6 Select the Color Scheme Legend, and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme
panel ➤ Edit Scheme.
7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, for Schemes, click Pipe Color Fill - Size, and click OK.
This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.

8 Press Esc to clear the selection.

Sizing Pipe | 147


Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods

9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps.
10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps, press
Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network
up to a piece of equipment), and click to select the branch.

11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.

IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report
the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run.

12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog:


■ Under Sizing Method, select Friction, and enter 2.25 FT/100ft.

■ Select And, and for Velocity, enter 5 FPS.

■ Under Constraints, for Branch Sizing, select Larger of Connector and Calculated.

■ Click OK.

The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified.

13 Press Esc.

148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of
converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient
space to create the pipe, or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components,
select a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe
connectivity after modification.

14 Close the file with or without saving it.

Inspecting the System


In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. The System
Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over
a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Using the System Inspector, you can easily
detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately.

Training File

■ Click ➤ Open.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i.rvt.

Inspect the system

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ 3D Views, and
double-click 3D HVAC Building.
2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on
the upper level.

Inspecting the System | 149


3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.
4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.
Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in
the pipe system. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler.

NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly.

5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping.


An inspection flag reports the section number, flow, and pressure information including pressure
loss. This information helps you modify the system design, as required.

NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe, the selected system
components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system
components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe
(physical connection).

150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


Modify fluid temperature

6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level,
as shown.

Note that the Flow is 80 GPM, the Static Pressure is 7.67 psi, and the Pressure Loss is 1.89 psi.

7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.


8 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Fluid Temperature, select 90° F, and click OK.
9 Using the same method, inspect Section 6 again, and notice that the Static Pressure is 7.65 psi
and the Pressure Loss is 1.88 psi.
10 Click Finish.
11 Close the file with or without saving it.

Checking Piping Systems


Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure,
and to size pipe. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the
overall systems design, you need to validate them. In this exercise, you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to
quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project, targeting those systems that need
attention.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open.

Checking Piping Systems | 151


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical
Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i.rvt.

Perform a systems check

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans,
and double-click Level 3 - HVAC Plan - Design.
2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems.
Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping
system throughout the project.
Warnings display. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty.

NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can
refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical
connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Remember that after you create pipe to
physically connect a system, the pipe is associated with that system. Pipe geometry is used for system
flow and pressure calculations, and for pipe sizing. Note that only physical connections associated
with an assigned system are checked. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the
Unassigned folder) is not checked.

IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. As you
learned when placing components, all system components must be assigned to a system after they
are placed. If you place components without assigning them to a system, Revit MEP creates a default
system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default system is placed
in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them, thus
assigning the components to a system. After you assign components to a system, Revit MEP moves
them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. After you have assigned all
components to systems, the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer
display not empty warnings. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system
and in the Unassigned folder. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected
to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors), and you have not yet assigned the
component to the other systems. For example, you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply
hydronic system, but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned
to a system. In the System Browser, the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and
assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder.

Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments

3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.


4 In the System Browser, right-click the Systems titlebar, and click View.
5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected.
You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to
confirm specified and default system assignments.

6 In the Project Browser, under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans,
double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design.
7 In the System Browser, expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing
Boiler: 500 MBH is listed.
8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH; notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed,
under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed.
9 Right-click CHWS, and click Show to view all of the system components.
The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. A dialog lets you click Show multiple
times for different views.

152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System


TIP If you have multiple views open, you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to
switch between views; otherwise, click Close.

10 Using the same methods, expand the Unassigned folder, and confirm unassigned system
components.
11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down, and select Level 3 - HVAC
Plan - Design floor plan.
12 In the System Browser, right-click Hydronic Return, and click Expand All.
The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source
heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system.

13 Right-click CHWR, and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.
14 Using the methods that you learned, confirm the system and the system assignments for the
Hydronic Supply system.
You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their
systems.

15 Close the file with or without saving it.

Checking Piping Systems | 153


154
Creating an Electrical
System

In this tutorial, you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

155
156
Planning an Electrical
System 7
In this lesson, you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to:

■ Specify electrical settings.


■ Define required lighting.
■ Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.
Color fill plan with required lighting levels

■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule

157
Specifying Electrical Settings
Electrical settings determine the voltages, wiring, distribution systems, and demand factors that are applied
in the design. As you place components and create circuits, Revit MEP checks to ensure that components
are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems, speeding up the design phase.
In this exercise you review electrical settings. You also add a wiring type.
Training File

■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click (Open).

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i.rvt.

Add a correction factor

1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.
2 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ In the left pane, expand Wiring - Wire Sizes.

■ Select Correction Factor.


■ For Material, select Copper.

■ For Temperature, select 90.

■ Click New Correction Factor.

■ For Factor, enter 1.04.

■ Click OK.

Add a wiring type

3 In the left pane, select Wiring Types.


4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ For Name, enter THHN.

■ For Material, select Copper.

■ For Temperature Rating, select 75.

158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System


■ For Insulation, select THHN.

■ For Max Size, enter 2000.

■ For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0.

■ Select Neutral Required.

■ For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size.

■ For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition

5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions.


The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage
definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with
rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value.

6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:


■ For Name, enter 240.

■ For Value, enter 240.

■ For Minimum, enter 220.

■ For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system

7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems.


Note the 3 distribution systems listed.

8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:


■ For Name, enter 120/240.

■ For Phase, select Single.

■ For Wires, select 3.

■ For L-L Voltage, select 240.

■ For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors

9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors.


You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building.

10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:


■ For Load Classification, select Power.

■ Under More Than, select 10000 VA.

■ Click Split.

■ Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50.

■ Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it.


Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159


Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building,
such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required
Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces
in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to
map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and,
because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level.
Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level
against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan.
Training File

■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click (Open).

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting

1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.


2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add.
3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ For Name, enter Required Lighting Level.

■ For Discipline, select Electrical.

■ For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance.

■ For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting.

■ Under Categories, select Spaces.

■ Verify that Instance is selected.

■ Click OK twice.
The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance
parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter

4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan.
5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select
Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System


7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level
parameter. Click OK.
Create a schedule for required lighting levels

8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities.


9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ For Category, select Spaces.

■ For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements.

■ Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels.

■ Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required
Lighting Level, and click OK.
The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings.

11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the
text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table

12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New.


13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office.
14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45.
15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows.
17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter
type, which is mapped to project units.
Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can
change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161


Change the sort order of the schedule

18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties.


19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit.
20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level.

■ Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice.
The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting.
The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name.

Apply a lighting level to spaces

23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans
and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan.
24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.
Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank.

26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select
Instruction-Standard.
Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since
the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System


only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for
Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for
the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies
only to the selected space.

27 Click OK.
You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and
specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it.


Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules


Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and
schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents.
In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the
previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components.
Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting
design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required
and the calculated illuminance values.
Training File

■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click (Open).

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme

1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes.
2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces.

■ Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK.
4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels.

■ For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:


■ Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163


■ Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value).
This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new
value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value
will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will
be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

■ With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click (Add Value) again.

■ Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click (Add Value).

■ Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click (Add Value).

■ Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER.

■ Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

■ Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF.
7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend.
8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing.
9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ For Space Type, select Spaces.

■ For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting.

■ Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously
created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System


Create a space lighting analysis schedule

10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities.


11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ For Category, select Spaces.

■ For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average
Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level.
13 Click Calculated Value.
14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ For Name, enter Lighting Delta.

■ For Discipline, select Electrical.

■ For Type, select Illuminance.

■ For Formula, click Browse.


■ In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination.

■ Click OK.

■ In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination,
press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.

■ In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level.

■ Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:


■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line.

■ On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta.

■ Click Conditional Format.


■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165


■ For Value, enter -5 fc and 5 fc.

■ Click Background Color.


■ In the Color dialog, for Custom Colors, select Red.

■ Click OK three times.

The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted
in red.

16 Close the file with or without saving it.

166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System


Designing an Electrical
System 8
In this lesson, you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits, power circuits, and switch systems) by establishing
logical connections between electrical components. You learn to:

■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels.
■ Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures.
■ Create power loads.
■ Use the System Browser to check your design.
■ Balance wire sizes and breaker service.
■ Create a panel schedule.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills


In this exercise, you place lighting fixtures in the drawing, using the color fill plan and the space analysis
schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels.
First, you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. These
values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values
and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels.
Then, as you place lighting fixtures, you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level
requirements have been satisfied.

167
Training File

■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click (Open).

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\03_Electrical
Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i.rvt.

Modify the color fill plan


1 Verify that the Level 2 - Lighting Color Fill view is open.
2 In the drawing area, select the color legend.

3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.
4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ Under Schemes, for the Spaces Category, select Average Estimated Illumination.
You can create additional color schemes, then modify the color scheme legend to use the
color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.

■ Under Scheme Definition, select the color for Less Than 20.00 fc.

■ In the Color dialog, for Basic Colors, select Orange.

■ Click OK.

5 Click OK.
Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20.00 fc. By using orange
as the color for this range, we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet
the specified lighting requirements.

6 Press ESC to deselect the legend.

168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


7 In the Project Browser, expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.
8 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Ceiling Plans
and open the Level 2 - Lighting Ceiling plan.
9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.
10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active.
11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.
12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.
Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order, with the last activated window appearing
in the upper-left corner.

13 Click the Level 2 - Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.


Add fixtures

14 In the drawing area, zoom to space Library 219.

As you add lighting fixtures to the Library, the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis
will automatically update. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values
of 0 fc (conditional format), and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/- 5 fc range specified in
the conditional format of this field. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below
20 fc, which is the lowest value in the specified range. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library, all three
of these colored fields will clear to white, indicating a value greater than 0 fc. The red field will clear once
the +/- 5 fc range is satisfied. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the
illumination level above 20 fc. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. Note that
the lighting delta can be cleared, however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified
value because of the +/- 5 fc range. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design
requirements are met.

15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.


16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed
Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) - 277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 - 277.
17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169


The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan, so that as the
ceiling plan moves vertically, the fixtures will move accordingly.

18 Click to place the fixture.


19 Press ESC to end the command.

In the Space Lighting Analysis view, the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for
space Library 219 are updated.

20 Select the lighting fixture.


21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance
Properties.
22 In the Instance Properties dialog, verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization
is selected.

NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill
plan and schedule.

23 Click OK.
24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.
25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple.
26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid.

27 Press ESC to end the command.


28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures.
29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.
30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple.
31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171


32 Press ESC.
The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Note the value in red for the space Library 219.
Modify multiple fixture instances

34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.
36 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, and for Category, select Lighting Fixtures. Click OK.
37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed
Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173


The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’
(3 Lamp) - 277V.
The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.


41 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment.
42 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175


43 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

The fixture aligns.

44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


45 Press ESC to end the command.
46 Close the file with or without saving it.
In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures


In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output
using the fewest number of fixtures.
Training File

■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click (Open).

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\03_Electrical
Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i.rvt.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177


Create a new lighting fixture type

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans
and open the Level 2 - Lighting Color Fill plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤
Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities
and open Space Lighting Analysis.
2 Tile the views as shown.

3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view, scroll to view space space Library 219.
Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.

4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view, zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture
shown.

5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance
Properties.
6 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ Click Edit Type.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


■ In the Type Properties dialog:

■ Click Duplicate.

■ In the Name dialog, for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W - 277V and click OK.

■ Under Electrical Loads, for Apparent Load, enter 162.00 VA.

■ Under Identity Data, for Type Mark, enter F15.

■ Under Electrical, for Lamp, select T5 [HO].

■ Under Photometrics, click the value for Light Loss Factor.

■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog, for Ballast Loss Factor, enter .93.

■ For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation, enter .85.

■ Click OK.

■ Click Apply.
Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule, the Lighting Delta for the Library is
updated.

■ Under Photometrics, click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse.

■ In the Select File dialog, select 463T5_S.ies and click Open.

■ Under Photometrics, click the value for Initial Intensity.

■ In the Initial Intensity dialog, select Luminous Flux, specify 15000.00 lm, and click OK.

■ Under Photometrics, click the value for Initial Color.

■ In the Initial Color dialog, for Color Preset, select Xenon and click OK.

■ Click OK twice.

7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.


Note the lighting type has changed to F14.

Apply the lighting fixture type

8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179


9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.
10 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, and for Category, select Lighting Fixtures. Click OK.
11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and
select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W - 277V.
Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated, and that the lighting delta for the
Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated.

12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures.


Remove lighting fixtures

13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


Press Delete.
Note the lighting delta updates again.

Apply the fixture type to other fixtures

14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.


15 In space Library 219, select the top center fixture.
16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181


17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.
Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.

Remove lighting fixtures

18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.

182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


Press Delete.
The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0.

19 Close the file with or without saving it.


In the next exercise, you add switches, junction boxes, and receptacles to your design.

Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles


In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. The procedure
for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP.
Training File

■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click (Open).

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\03_Electrical
Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i.rvt.

Place lighting switches


1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.
2 In the drawing area, zoom to space Computer Lab 222.

Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles | 183


3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.
4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select
Wall Occupancy Sensor - Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared - 277V.
5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.
6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.

Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host, it is only previewed when the cursor is
over a wall.

7 Click to place the switch.

184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.

9 Press ESC to end the command.


Place junction boxes

10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.


11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.
12 In the Load Family dialog, browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical
Components ➤ Power Devices. Select Junction Boxes - NoLoad.rfa and click Open.
The element type Junction Boxes - NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector.

13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.

Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles | 185


14 Press ESC to end the command.
15 Select the junction box.
16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance
Properties.
17 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ Under Constraints, for Level 2 - Offset, enter 9’0”.

NOTE When entering values, you can enter a space to separate the unit values.

■ Under Identity Data, for Mark, enter JB-1NL.

■ Under Electrical, note the Number of Poles is 1.

■ Click Edit Type.

■ In the Type Properties dialog, note that Apparent Load is set to 0.

■ Click OK twice.

18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box.


Place wall-hosted receptacles

19 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the
Level 2 Power Plan view.
20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open.
21 In the drawing area, zoom to space Library 219.

186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

NOTE If necessary, dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window.

23 In the System Browser, right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Right-click
the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical.
24 For any column, right-click and click Column Settings.
25 In the Column Settings dialog:
■ Click Check None.

■ Expand General.

■ Select Size, Space Name, Space Number, and Number of Elements.

■ Expand Electrical.

■ Select Load, Distribution System, and Voltage.

■ Click OK.

26 In the System Browser, expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219.

This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Note that the
values for the space Library 219 are currently blank.

Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles | 187


27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.
28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex
Receptacle: Standard.
29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown.

30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.

31 Close the System Browser.


Reposition the receptacle

32 Select the receptacle on the right.


33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.

34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown.

35 Select the dimension and enter 12’.

188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter.

36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.


Place additional receptacles

37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown.

38 Select the receptacle.


39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.
40 On the Options Bar, select Copy and Multiple.

Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles | 189


41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle, move the cursor along the wall, and enter 12’ and press
ENTER.

42 Move the cursor down, enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle.

190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


43 Press ESC to end the command.

Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles | 191


Place floor-hosted receptacles

44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.


45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.
46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.
47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


48 Close the file with or without saving it.
Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire


In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Although the
connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans, you need to create logical
connections to define the topology. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193


equipment. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2), and work toward the higher voltage, main
distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).

In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings, then create lighting circuitry and
add wiring as the circuits are created. Adding wiring to a project is optional.
Training File

■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click (Open).

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\03_Electrical
Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i.rvt.

Add panelboards
1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.
2 In the drawing area, zoom to the space Electrical 220.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.

194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and
Appliance Panelboard - Surface: 100A.
5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face.
6 Click to place the panelboard as shown.

7 Press ESC to end the command.


8 Select the panelboard.
9 On the Options Bar, for Distribution System, select 120/208 Wye.
10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties
drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.
11 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ Under Electrical - Loads, for Max. #1 Pole Breakers, enter 20.

■ For Panel Name, enter PP-2B.

■ Click OK.

12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.


13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - Surface:
100A panelboard as shown.

14 Select the panelboard.


15 On the Options Bar, for Distribution System, select 480/277 Wye.
16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties
drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195


17 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ Under Electrical - Loads, for Max. #1 Pole Breakers, enter 20.

■ For Panel Name, enter LP-2B.


Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values.

■ Click OK.

18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.


Add a circuit with wire

19 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open
Level 2 Lighting Plan view.
20 In the drawing area, zoom to space Instruction 221.

21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space.


22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.
23 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, and for Category, select Lighting Devices and Lighting
Fixtures. Click OK.
24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.
The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit, which is the logical connection between the
elements.

196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.
26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected
panel.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197


28 Press ESC to end the command.
Add a switch

29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.


30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three
Way.
31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.

32 Press ESC.
33 Select the switch on the right.

198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type
Selector drop-down.

35 Select the left three-way switch, right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.
36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199


37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

38 Press ESC to end the command.


39 Select all items in space Instruction 221.
40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.
41 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, and for Category, select Wires. Click OK.
42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.
43 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ Under Electrical - Loads, for Hot Conductors, enter 2.

■ Click OK.

Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4.

44 Close the file with or without saving it.


Next you create circuits without showing wire.

Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire


This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits, except without wire.
Training File

■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click (Open).

200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\03_Electrical
Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i.rvt.

Add a circuit without wire


1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.
2 In the drawing area, zoom to space Computer Lab 222.
3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.
4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit.

5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.


6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit.
7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor.
8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel.
9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220.

10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.
Check circuits

11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.


12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing.
13 In the System Browser, right-click on the Systems heading, and click View ➤ Systems and
Electrical.
14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings.
15 In the Column Settings dialog:
■ Expand General and review the settings.

■ Expand Electrical, and verify that Load, Distribution System, Voltage, Rating, and Voltage
Drop are selected.

■ Click OK.

16 In the System Browser, expand Power.


17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B, and then expand circuit 1.

Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201


Note the circuit in space Instruction 221.

18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices.


The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are
connected to a panel. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in
which the devices are located.

Add additional devices to the circuit

19 In the drawing area, zoom to space Computer Lab 222.


20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element
Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.
21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical, change the Voltage to 277V. Click OK.
22 With the junction box still selected, right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.
23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it.
Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. The System Browser
is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project.

View circuit information

24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.


25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit.
26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab
222.
27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.
28 Select one of the occupancy sensors.
29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit.

30 Close the System Browser.

202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


Add tags to fixtures

31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.


32 On the Options Bar:
■ Deselect Leader.

■ Click Tags.

33 In the Tags dialog:


■ For Lighting Fixtures, select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard.

■ Click OK.

34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222.


35 Press ESC to end the command.
36 Select the upper-left fixture.
37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance
Properties.
38 In the Instance Properties dialog, click Edit Type.
39 In the Type Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Type Mark, enter FR4.
40 Click OK twice.
Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated.

41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.


Edit tags

42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Click Yes.
43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label.
44 In the Edit Label dialog, note the label parameters and click Cancel.
45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.
46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top.
47 In the drawing area, click below the first one to place it.

Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203


48 In the Edit Label dialog:
■ Under Category Parameters, select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s)

to label .

■ Select Wrap between parameters only.

■ For Circuit Number, select Break.

■ Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area.

■ Deselect Break and for Suffix, enter a comma, and click Apply.

■ Click OK.

49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.
50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left.

51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family.


52 In the Save As dialog, for File Name, enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag.rfa. Click Save.
53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.
Note the tag is updated in the drawing area.

Add tags to remaining fixtures

54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222.


55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.
56 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, and for Category, select Lighting Fixture Tags. Click OK.
57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch
ID Tag: Standard.
Note the tags are updated in the drawing area.

58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.


59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and
click Apply. Click OK.
60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures.
61 Close the file with or without saving it.
Next you create a switch system.

Creating a Switch System


In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system.

204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


Training File

■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click (Open).

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\03_Electrical
Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i.rvt.

Create a switch system


1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.
2 In the drawing area, zoom to space Computer Lab 222.
3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.
4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.
5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.
6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System.
7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space.
8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.
9 Select the occupancy sensor.
10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.
11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system.

12 Select the occupancy sensor.


13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance
Properties.
14 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical Lighting, for Switch ID, enter a. Click OK.
Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID.

Creating a Switch System | 205


15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor.
16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall.
17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.
18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.
19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System.
20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures.
21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.
22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall.
23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties.
24 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, for switch ID, enter b. Click OK.
25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.
Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID.

206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


26 Close the file with or without saving it.
Next you create a circuit and size wire.

Creating Power Loads


In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Circuits are used for
power, lighting, and data systems. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show
logical connections between different components in the system.
Training File

■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click (Open).

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\03_Electrical
Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i.rvt.

Add a circuit
1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.
2 In the drawing area, zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the
components in the space.
3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.
4 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, and for Category, select Electrical Fixtures. Click OK.
5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.
6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.
7 In space Electrical 220, select the PP-2B panel.

Creating Power Loads | 207


8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.
9 Press ESC to deselect the wires.
10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel, and click Element Properties.
11 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Loads, for Hot Conductors, enter 2. Click
OK.
12 Press ESC to deselect the wire.
Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks.

13 Select the wire again, and in the drawing area, click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark.
14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.
15 In the Load Family dialog, navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks,
select Hook Wire Tick Mark.rfa, and click Open.
16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.
17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog, select Wiring, and in the right pane, for Ground
Wire Tick Mark, select Hook Wire Tick Mark.
18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark, select Long Wire Tick Mark.
19 Click OK.

208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral
conductors display as a long tick mark.

Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun

20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222, press Tab to display a preview of
the circuit wiring, and click to select the circuit.

21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.


22 In space Electrical 220, select the PP-2B panel.
23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.
24 Press ESC to deselect the wires.
25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second
receptacle in space Instruction 221, as shown.

Creating Power Loads | 209


26 Press Delete.
27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc.
28 In the drawing area, in space Instruction 221, click the connector of the first receptacle, click a
point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc, and then click the
connector of the second receptacle as shown.

29 In space Instruction 221, add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221,
and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222, as shown.

Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction
221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. There are only 3 tick marks

210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. An additional hot conductor is added
to the 221 wiring.

30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220, and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction
221.

Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun.

31 Close the file with or without saving it.


Next you balance the loads for your design.

Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service


In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels, then you examine the
loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Finally, you verify and adjust wire sizes that
Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits.
Training File

■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click Open.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\03_Electrical
Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i.rvt.

Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. This will reduce
neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Balancing loads
begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source.

Balance circuit loads


1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open.
2 In the drawing area, zoom to space Electrical 220.
3 In the Electrical space, select panel LP-2B.

Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211


4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits.
Notice that the loads on Phase A, B, and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA
on Phase A, while Phase B provides 2004 VA, and Phase C provides 2028 VA.

5 In the Edit Circuits dialog, click Rebalance Loads.


The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A - 3712 VA, Phase B -
3636 VA, and Phase C - 3616 VA).

6 Click OK.
Verify and adjust wire sizes

7 With panel LP-2B still selected, click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit
Properties.
8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit:
■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12, 1-#12, 1-#12.

■ Under Electrical-Loads, for Rating, enter 30A.


Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating.

■ Scroll down, and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10, 1-#10, 1-#10.

■ Click OK.

Adjust circuit breaker sizes

9 Select panel PP-2B.

10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.


11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit.
12 Select panel PP-2B.
13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.
A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted.

14 Close the warning dialog.

212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


15 Select panel PP-2B.
16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.
A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for
the circuit you are creating.

17 Close the warning dialog.


18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.
19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit, under Electrical - Loads, for Rating, enter 25A,
and click OK.
20 Click OK to close the warning dialog.
21 With panel PP-2B still selected, Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element
Properties.
22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit, under Electrical - Loads, for Rating, enter 30A,
and click OK.
The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load.

23 With panel PP-2B still selected, click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.
24 Select the transformer TP-2B.
Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B.

25 Press ESC to deselect the panel.


26 Close the file with or without saving it.
Next you create a panel schedule.

Creating a Panel Schedule


In this exercise, you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1.
Training File

■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click (Open).

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\03_Electrical
Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i.rvt.

Create the panel schedule report


1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open.
2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule.
3 In the Select Panels dialog:
■ Click Clear Selection.

■ Select PP-2B.

■ Click OK.

The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window.

Creating a Panel Schedule | 213


NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel, the panel will not appear in the Select
Panels dialog.

4 Close the report.


5 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and open E601 - Panel Schedules.
6 In the Project Browser, under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule, drag PP-2B onto the sheet.
7 Select the schedule.
8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.
9 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Appearance, click Edit.
The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. This dialog allows you to control how the panel
schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet.

10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog:


■ Under Header Text, for Font, select Berlin Sans FB.

■ Under Header Text, for Font Size, enter 1/8.

■ Under Header Text, select Bold and Italic.

■ Under Body Text, for Font Size, enter 3/32.

11 Click OK twice.
12 Close the file with or without saving it.
Next you use the System Browser to check your design.

Checking Your Design


In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous
exercises. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your
project. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are
connected.
Training File

■ On the Quick Access toolbar, click (Open).

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\03_Electrical
Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i.rvt.

214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


View unassigned components
1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open.
2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.
3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area.
4 In the System Browser:
■ Right-click a column heading, and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the
System Browser.

■ Expand Unassigned.
Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212.

■ Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2.


The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that
are connected to panel PP-2C. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2, each with a load
of 180VA. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which
the devices are located.

5 In the drawing area, select space Lounge 212.


6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once.
Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2.

7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once.
In the System Browser, note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit.

8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall, press TAB once, and then click the
receptacle to select the circuit.
9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.
10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit.
11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall.
12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.
In the System Browser, notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated.

Check circuits

13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits.

Checking Your Design | 215


14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector, click
(Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning.
15 In the dialog, under Warnings, expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a
panel ➤ Warning 2.
Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected.

16 Close the details dialog.


17 In the drawing area, zoom to space Electrical 214.
18 Select panel LP-2C.

19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.


20 On the Options Bar, for Panel, select MDP-1.
21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.
22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.
Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1.

23 Close the file with or without saving it.

216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System


Creating a Plumbing
System

In this tutorial, you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

217
218
Planning a Plumbing
System 9
Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project; planning is critical to a successful design. In this
lesson, you prepare to design the plumbing system by:

■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type.


■ Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.
■ Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.
■ Adding a pipe size.

Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System


Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. You
load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems.
In this exercise, in addition to loading existing families, you create a PVC pipe type, and specify the default
fittings that will be used with this type.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i.rvt.

Create a pipe type

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans,
and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.
2 In the Project Browser, expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types, right-click PVC - Sanitary, and
click Properties.
3 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
4 In the Name dialog, type PVC - Vent, and click OK.

219
5 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for:
■ Preferred Junction Type, select Tee.

■ Tee, select Tee Vent - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV: Standard.

■ Tap, select None.

■ Cross, select Tee Reducing Double Vent - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV: Standard.

6 Click OK.
In the Project Browser, under Pipe Types, PVC - Vent is listed.

Load piping component families

7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.


8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.
9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Families\Trap
P - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV.rfa.
DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent.

10 On the Selection panel, click Modify.


The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.

Specify sanitary piping settings

11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .


12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog, click Pipe Settings.
13 In the right panel, for Pipe Connector Tolerance, enter 10°.

NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings, refer to Revit MEP Online Help.

14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main.


15 For System Type, select Sanitary.
16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping:
■ For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary.

■ For Offset, enter -4' - 0''.

17 In the left pane, under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, select Branch.


18 For System Type, select Sanitary.
19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main.
Add a pipe size

20 In the left pane, select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes.


21 In the right pane, for Material, select Plastic.
22 Click New Size.
23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog, for Nominal, enter 1/2''.
24 For Inside Diameter, enter 5/8''.
25 For Outside, enter 27/32''.
26 Click OK.
27 For the new pipe size, verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected, and click
OK.
28 Close the file with or without saving it.

220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System


Designing a Plumbing
System 10
In this lesson, you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building, including plumbing
fixtures, sanitary piping, vent, and hot and cold water piping.
You learn to:

■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures.


■ Create the sanitary plumbing system.
■ Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system.
■ Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system.
■ Create the cold water system, and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.
■ Create the hot water system, add a hot water heater, and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water
system.

221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in
a later exercise.

Training File

■ Click ➤ Open.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\04_Plumbing
Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans,
and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.
2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male
107), as shown.

NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip
or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference
lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.


4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted,
select Public - 1.6 gpf.
5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.
6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom
horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223


7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference
line to center the fixture.)
8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal

9 In the Type Selector, under Urinal - Wall Hung, select 3/4'' Flush Valve.
10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc.

NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


Place a floor drain

11 In the Type Selector, under Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 5''x5'' Strainer - 2'' Drain.
12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face.
In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain.

13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and
6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225


Open the System Browser

15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.


16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area.
17 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click
View ➤ Piping.
18 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and
Default Domestic Cold Water.
The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default
system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold
water connectors).

19 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system.
20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included
because it does not have a cold water connector.
21 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System


This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing
system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You
then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

■ Click ➤ Open.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\04_Plumbing
Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i.rvt.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


Create the sanitary plumbing system

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans,
and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.
2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D
Plumbing.
3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.
4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views.
5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window
at the bottom of the screen.
6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection
box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.


8 In the Filter dialog, clear Lines (<Overhead>), verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected, and click
OK.
Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227


9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary.
The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available.
All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the
drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.
11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107.
You include the bathroom space number in the name.

12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System.


13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed.
The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107
system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


Create physical connections

14 In the plan view, select one of the components in the system, for example, a toilet.
15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.
16 In the Select a System dialog, select Sanitary 107, and click OK.
A preview of the piping layout displays.

17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base.


The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an
outlet for flow.

18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet, at the midpoint of the detail lines, as
shown.

The base is placed.

Creating a Sanitary System | 229


19 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 4'', and for Offset, enter -4'-0”.
The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. The
elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system.

20 On the Generate Layout panel, click Solutions.


21 On Options Bar, for Solution Type, select Intersections, and click Settings.
You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout.

22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, select Main.
23 For Offset, enter -1' 0''.
24 In the left pane, select Branch, for Offset, enter -1' 0'', and click OK.
The default settings are automatically modified. When laying out a number of different systems
with different offset requirements, it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work.

25 On the Options Bar, for Slope, enter 1/8'' / 12''.


The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point.

26 On the Options Bar, click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected.
You accept this suggested solution, and modify it to meet project requirements.

27 Click Modify.

230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


Customize the suggested layout

28 While pressing Ctrl, select the vertical route path segments.

29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow), and move the cursor to the left to align all 4
segments to the base point.

Creating a Sanitary System | 231


30 In the 3D view, use the ViewCube to orient the view, as shown.

31 Click Modify.
32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets, and drag the line to the left to snap
perpendicular to the main, as shown.

232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


33 Using the previous method, adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.

34 On the Generate Layout panel, click Finish Layout.

Creating a Sanitary System | 233


Examine the piping

Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view.


35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures, and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.
■ 1=Branch in a network

■ 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects

■ 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment

■ 4=Network (including fixtures)

36 Click to select the fitting to the drain, and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.
When a fitting is reversed, select the fitting and click to reorient it.

234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting, and check the slope control. The slope control
for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet, as shown.

38 Close the file with or without saving it.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System


In this exercise, you continue with the work from the last exercise, adding sinks in the men’s room, and
manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235


Training File

■ Click ➤ Open.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\04_Plumbing
Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.rvt.

Add sinks to the layout

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans,
and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.
2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.


4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under Lavatory - Rectangular, select 22''x22'' - Public.
5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.
6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line, as shown.

236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


7 Click Modify.
8 Select the sink.
9 Make 2 copies of the sink:
■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

■ On the Options Bar, select Multiple.

■ Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.

■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line, enter 2' 4'', and press Enter to create a second
sink.

TIP When entering dimensions, you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches,
without having to enter ' and '' symbols. For example, in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space
four) to specify 2' 4''.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237


■ Enter 2' 4'', and press Enter to create the third sink.

■ Press Esc.

Add sinks to the sanitary system

10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window
at the bottom of the screen.
11 In the System Browser, expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107.
12 In the drawing area, select a component of the Sanitary 107 system.
13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.
14 On the Edit Piping System panel, click Add To System.
15 Click the 3 sinks.
16 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System.

238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


In the System Browser, notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107
system.

Create piping to connect the sinks

17 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing.
18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.
19 In the 3D view, use the ViewCube to orient the view, as shown, and zoom in to the elbow fitting
for the urinal.

20 Select the fitting, and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee.

21 Select the tee.

22 In the plan view, with the tee fitting selected, right-click the top connector (sanitary connector),
and click Draw Pipe.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239


23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option.
24 On the Options Bar, for Slope, enter 1/8'' / 12''.
25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink, press Spacebar, and click to draw the
pipe.
When you press the Spacebar, the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation
of the fitting.

26 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2' - 6'', and click Apply.
27 Click Modify.

NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.
In this example, piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green.

240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


3D view shown for clarity

28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.


29 In the Type Selector, under Wye 45 Deg Double - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard.
30 In the 3D view, move the cursor over the stub pipe, and when the vertical center line displays,
click to place the fitting.

31 Click Modify.
32 Select the double wye fitting, and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to
the sinks.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241


33 With the fitting selected, on the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 6'', and press Enter.
34 Press Esc.
Add pipe stubs to the double wye

35 In the plan view, double-click the section head to open the section view.

36 In the section view, zoom in to the double wye fitting.


In the next steps, you add pipe segments to the double wye.

37 Select the fitting, right-click the right connector, and click Draw Pipe.
38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option.
39 Draw the pipe as shown:
■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right, enter 1', and press Enter.

242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension
tool, which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.

■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with
the centerline of the right sink, and click to place the pipe.

40 Click Modify.
41 Using the same method, draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°),
as shown.

42 Click Modify.
43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243


44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping, and
press Esc.

Add P-Trap Fittings

45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views.
46 In the section view, draw a selection box around the left sink to select it, right-click the bottom
connector, and click Draw Pipe.
47 Move the cursor down, press Spacebar, enter 6'', and press Enter to create the segment of pipe.

48 Click Modify.
49 Using the same method, draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks.

244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.
51 In the Type Selector, under Trap P - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard.
52 In the plan view, click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.

You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3
P-Traps.

53 Using the same method, place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.


54 Click Modify.
55 In the 3D view, select the P-Trap on the left, and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the
pipe toward the double wye piping.

56 Using the same method, rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245


57 Finish the connection for the left sink:
■ In the 3D view, select the left P-Trap,.

■ Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

■ Select the double wye pipe on the left.


The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created.

58 Using the same method, connect the right sink to the double wye.
59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution:
■ In the 3D view, click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.

■ Click in the plan view.

■ In the plan view, right-click the left connector on the P-Trap, and click Draw Pipe.

■ Move the cursor to the left, enter 6'', and press Enter.

■ Click Modify.

246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


■ In the 3D view, while pressing Ctrl, select the section of pipe you just drew, and select the
vertical section of pipe from the wye.

■ Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions.


Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points,
and select a proposed solution.

■ In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select PVC Sanitary.

■ On the Routing Solutions panel, click Finish to select the recommended solution.

■ Press Esc.

Specify a slope

60 In the 3D view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks, as shown.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247


61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope.
62 On the Options Bar, for Slope, verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected.
63 On the Slope Editor panel, click Finish.
You have appropriately sloped the pipe.

64 Select a pipe that you just modified, and verify the slope.
65 Close the file with or without saving it.

Refining the Sanitary Stack


In this exercise, you continue with the work on the sanitary system, adjusting the sanitary stack.

Training File

■ Click ➤ Open.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\04_Plumbing
Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i.rvt.

248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


Add a vertical soil stack

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design, and open the
following views:
■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design.

■ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.

■ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing- Overall.

2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile, and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.
3 In the Section view, select the elbow fitting on the right, as shown.

4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.


5 Select the tee, right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe.
6 Move the cursor up to the 02 - Floor level line, and click to draw the pipe.

7 On the Selection panel, click Modify.


Add a reducing wye to the stack

8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.


9 In the Type Selector, under Wye Combination with 8th Bend - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select
Standard.
10 In the 3D view, select the vertical stack, and click the intersection to place the fitting.

Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249


11 Click Modify.
12 Select the fitting, and click the rotate control to change the orientation.
13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 1'-0”.


15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout

16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.


17 In the Type Selector, under Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard.
18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


19 Click Modify.
The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System


In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in
the men’s room to the system.

Training File

■ Click ➤ Open.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\04_Plumbing
Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans,
and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251


2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .
3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click
Main.
4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water.
5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water.

■ For Offset, verify that the value is 9' 0''.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the
same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system.
7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water.
8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water.

■ For Offset, enter 9' 3''.


To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for
the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold
Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.)
10 Click OK.
Create the cold water system

11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing
- Overall.
12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.
13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the
bottom of the screen.
14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and
notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed.
These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors.
15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the
floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.)
16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.
17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water.
19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System.
20 On the Options Bar:
■ For System Name, enter DCW 107.

■ For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System.


In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because
all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW
107 to verify the components.

Create piping for the cold water system

22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack.
23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.
24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.
Notice that the water main displays in blue, indicating that it is now part of the cold water
system.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253


25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.
26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe.
27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected.
28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water.
29 On the Options Bar:
■ For Diameter, select 3/4''.

■ For Offset, enter 10'.

■ For Slope, enter 0”/12”.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as
shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3' - 2 7/8''.


32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify.
34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click
Draw Pipe.
35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected.
36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the
existing pipe, enter 7'', and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 4'0”, and press Enter.
38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates
Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]).
40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.
42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In, and
click OK.
43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255


44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System


In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks
in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


Training File

■ Click ➤ Open.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\04_Plumbing
Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.rvt.

Create the hot water system

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans,
and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.
2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D
Plumbing - Overall.
3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.
4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the
bottom of the screen.
5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot
Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed.
6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257


7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water.
8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties.
9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter Domestic Hot Water 107, and click
OK.
In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment.

10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks
(lavatories).
When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to
the appropriate system and clear the default folders.

Add a water heater

11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.


12 In the Type Selector, under Water Heater - Tankless, select 0.6 Gallon.
13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room
above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify.
15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic
Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are
created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.)
Add the water heater to DCW 107

16 Select a sink in the men’s room.


You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first.

17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit
System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.
19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System.
Connect the water heater to the cold water supply

20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw
Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected.


22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected.
23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ Diameter: 1''.

■ Offset: 4' 6''.

■ Slope: 0''/12''.

24 Move the cursor up, enter 1' 6'', and press Enter.
25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 10’.
26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify.
The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259


Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107

28 In the plan view, select a sink.


29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select Domestic Hot
Water 107.
30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System.
31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.
32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System.


Connect the water heater to the hot water supply

34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw
Pipe.
35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 1'', and for Offset, select 4'-6''.
36 Move the cursor down, enter 1' 6'', and press Enter.
37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 9' 0'', and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically
Connect to switch it off.
38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


39 Move the cursor down, enter 1’, and press Enter.
40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2' 8''.
41 Move the cursor down, and click just above the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261


43 In the 3D view, select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal), and click Modify Plumbing
Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.
44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew.

The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.

45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool, connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water
pipe.

262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System


46 Close the file with or without saving it.
47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.rvt project and view the vent piping for the
plumbing system.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263


264
Creating a Fire Protection
System

In this tutorial, you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

265
266
Planning a Fire Protection
System 11
The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. In
this tutorial, you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model, with Space components
placed in the areas throughout the model. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model, see Planning
Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial.
In this lesson, you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building.

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each exercise is dependent on the
completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is
highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This training file
includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you
use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. You can search this directory to
verify that the training files have been downloaded. If the tutorial training files are not present, go to
http://www.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.

Specifying Pipe Settings


In this exercise, you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. You create a new
pipe type, and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically
connect the sprinklers. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the
fire protection systems.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection
Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i.rvt.

Create a pipe type

1 In the Project Browser, expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.


2 Right-click Standard, and click Duplicate.
A copy is made of the Standard pipe type.

267
3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2), click Rename, and enter Fire Protection Wet.
4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet, and click Properties.
The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. Next, you modify the type
properties of the pipe.

5 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for Material, select Carbon Steel, and then
click OK.
6 In the Project Browser, verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed.
Configure pipe conversion settings

7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings.
8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog:
■ In the left pane, under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, select Main.

■ For System Type, select Fire Protection Wet.


The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display.

■ For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet.

■ For Offset, verify that 9' 0" is selected.


This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views.
Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing, so the pipe main
will be offset from level 2. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches.

■ In the left pane, select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch.

■ For System Type, select Fire Protection Wet.

■ For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet.

■ For Offset, verify that 9' 0" is specified.


This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the
views.

NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the
main and other obstacles. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes, duct, structural beams,
or architectural components.

9 Click OK.

NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping.
You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. However, you
should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. Configuring the
Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project.

10 Close the file with or without saving it.


In this exercise, you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties.
You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. In the next exercise,
you create project parameters and work with schedules.

Determining Zone Requirements


In this exercise, you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. You then assign spaces in the top portion of
the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone.

268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System


Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection
Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Create project parameters

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Floor
Plans ➤ Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.
3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add.
4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ Under Parameter Data, for Name, enter Sprinkler Zone.

■ For Group parameter under, select Fire Protection.

■ Under Categories, select Spaces.

5 Click OK twice.
6 In the drawing area, select space Instruction 221 as shown, right-click, and click Element
Properties.
When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip
and status bar display the space name.

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Fire Protection, for Sprinkler Zone, enter Zone 1, and
then click OK.
8 Using a crossing window, select the upper half of the building.
You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to
enclose.

Determining Zone Requirements | 269


9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.
10 In the Filter dialog, verify that only Spaces are selected, and click OK.
11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.
12 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Fire Protection, for Sprinkler Zone, select Zone 1, and
then click OK.
13 Using the same method, filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces, and then
access instance properties.

14 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Fire Protection, for Sprinkler Zone, enter Zone 2, and
then click OK.
15 Press Esc to clear the selection.
16 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule


In this exercise, you create schedules for sprinkler design, to which you add various parameters, including
a calculated value parameter. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the
schedule as a design tool.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection
Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i.rvt.

270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System


Create a key schedule

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Floor
Plans ➤ Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.
3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ Under Category, select Spaces.
Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added.

■ For Name, enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule.

■ Select Schedule keys.

■ For Key name, enter Protection Area Construction Type.

■ Click OK.

Create a schedule parameter

4 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click Add Parameter.


5 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ Under Parameter data, for Name, enter Maximum Spacing.

■ For Type of Parameter, select Length.

■ For Group parameter under, select Fire Protection.

■ Click OK.

6 Using the same method, create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area
type and is grouped under Fire Protection.
7 Click OK.
8 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Formatting tab.
9 On the Formatting tab, select Maximum Spacing, and click Field Format.
10 In the Format dialog, do the following:
■ Clear Use project settings.

■ For Units, select Feet and fractional inches.

■ For Rounding, select To the nearest 1'.

11 Click OK twice.
The schedule displays.

Add schedule data

12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header.
13 To resize the column widths in the schedule, double-click on each column separator.
14 Select the new header, and on the ribbon, click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule
panel ➤ Rows: New.
15 In the new row:
■ In the Protection Area Type column, enter Light, Obstructed-Combustible.

■ In the Maximum Spacing column, enter 15.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271


■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column, enter 130, and press Enter.

NOTE The units of measure display automatically, based on the parameter settings you specified
previously.

16 Using the same method, add more schedule data:


Protection Area Type Maximum Spa- Maximum Coverage
cing Area

Light, Obstructed-Noncombust- 15' 200 SF


ible

Light, Unobstructed 15' 200 SF

Extra, Obstructed-Combustible 12' 90 SF

Extra, Obstructed-Noncombustible 12' 90 SF

Extra, Unobstructed 12' 90 SF

Ordinary, Obstructed-Combustible 15' 130 SF

Ordinary, Obstructed-Noncom- 15' 130 SF


bustible

Ordinary, Unobstructed 15' 130 SF

Create a sprinkler schedule

17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.


18 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ For Category, select Spaces.

■ For Name, enter Sprinkler Schedule.

■ Click OK.

Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter

■ In the Schedule Properties dialog:


■ On the Fields tab, under Available fields, double-click in the order listed:
■ Number

■ Name

■ Sprinkler Zone

■ Level

■ Area

■ Protection Area Construction Type

272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System


■ Maximum Coverage Area

■ Maximum Spacing

■ Click Calculated Value.

■ In the Calculated Value dialog:


■ For Name, enter Minimum Sprinklers.

■ For Discipline, select Common.

■ For Type, select Number.

■ For Formula, click .

■ In the Fields dialog, select Area, and click OK.

■ Enter the formula operator / after Area, and then use the method learned previously
to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog.
The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area.
Click OK.
The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the
bottom of the list). This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately
determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements.

19 Click the Formatting tab.


20 On the Formatting tab, select Minimum Sprinklers, and click Field Format.
21 In the Format dialog:
■ Clear Use default settings.

■ For Units, select Fixed.

■ For Rounding, select 0 decimal place.

22 Click OK twice.
The Sprinkler Schedule displays.

Organize schedule data

23 Right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties.


24 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit.
25 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level.

■ Select Header and Blank line.

■ For Then by, select Sprinkler Zone.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273


■ Select Header and Blank line.

■ For Then by (second instance), select Number.

■ At the bottom of the dialog, select Grand totals, and select Totals only.

■ On the Formatting tab:


■ For Fields, select Sprinkler Zone.

■ Under Field formatting, select Hidden field.

■ For Fields, select Level, and then select Hidden field.

■ For Fields, select Minimum Sprinklers, and then click Field Format.

■ In the Format dialog, verify that Use default settings is selected.

26 Click OK 3 times.
The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified.

27 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties.
28 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Filter, click Edit.
29 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Filter by, select Level equals Level 2.
30 Click OK twice.

274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System


The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2.

Group schedule columns

31 In the drawing area, use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers.
32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group.
33 Click in the grouped header cell, and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage.
34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column, delete the word
Maximum.

Create an embedded schedule

35 Right-click the schedule, and click View Properties.


36 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit.
37 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ On the Embedded Schedule tab, select Embedded Schedule.

■ For Category, select Sprinklers, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

■ On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available fields, double-click Type,
System Name, and Count.

■ On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Count.

■ Under Field formatting, select Calculate totals.

■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab, select Grand totals, and select Totals only.

38 Click OK 3 times.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275


Modify space properties from the schedule

39 In the Project Browser, double-click FP - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan -
Design.
40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule.
41 In the plan view, select space 221 Instruction, and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element
panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.
42 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, notice that there is nothing specified for
Protection Area Construction Type. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum
Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection, but their values are
not determined.
43 Click Cancel.
44 In the schedule, select space 221 Instruction.
45 For Protection Area Construction Type, select Ordinary, Unobstructed.
46 With the space still selected, click in the floor plan to make it the active view, and access the
instance properties.
Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog, and the spacing
parameter values are evident.

47 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Protection Area Construction Type,
select Light, Unobstructed, and click OK.
The parameter change is evident in the schedule.

48 In the floor plan, use a selection box to select the upper half of the building.
49 Filter the selection for spaces only.
50 Access the instance properties.
51 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Protection Area Construction Type,
select Ordinary, Unobstructed.
52 Click OK.

IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool.
When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system, you are actually editing
information in a database of building information. As a result, each change is dynamic and immediately
propagates throughout your project. This digital database information source is the central concept
of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System


53 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277


278
Designing a Fire Protection
System 12
In this tutorial, you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. As you
create the system, you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk
Revit MEP 2010. By following the recommended workflow, you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit
MEP.
The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. At the end of
this tutorial, you will understand the process, methodology, and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems
in Revit MEP.

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each exercise is dependent on the
completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is
highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This training file
includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you
use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. You can search this directory to
verify that the training files have been downloaded. If the tutorial training files are not present, go to
http://www.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.

Adding Sprinklers
In this exercise, you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view, hosted to the linked architectural
ceiling family. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide
for sprinkler placement. As you place the sprinklers, you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely
place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection
Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i.rvt.

Place host-based sprinklers

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Ceiling Plans, and
double-click Level 2 - FP_Ceiling to make it the active view.

279
2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building.

After placing the initial sprinkler, you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of
ceiling grids. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient.

IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to
physical piping in later exercises. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently
separated to allow space for fittings. When there is a small misalignment, the layout path feature will
attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. When this happens, there is insufficient
space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail.

3 In the Project Browser, open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule.


4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile, and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally.

5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view.


6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler.

280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System


7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel, and select Sprinkler - Pendent - Semi-Recessed -
Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down.
8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling
tile face.
9 In space Instruction 202, place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles, and
click to place 3 sprinklers, as shown.

10 Press Esc twice.


Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. You
can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire
protection system, because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the
maximum distance between sprinklers.

Continue placing sprinklers

You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204, because the schedule
indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.
11 In the drawing area, while pressing Ctrl, select the sprinklers that you placed.

Adding Sprinklers | 281


12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.
Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Also, the cursor changes to indicate
that the Copy tool is active.

13 On the Options Bar, verify that Constrain is cleared, and that Copy and Multiple are selected.
14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point.

15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left, as shown, and then press Esc.

Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. Next, you place non-hosted
sprinklers.

282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System


Place non-hosted sprinklers

In this section, you place non-hosted sprinklers, specify a vertical offset, and array the sprinklers in the 3
spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A, 200B, and 200C). You place the system components based on the
design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule.
16 Close the ceiling plan view.
17 In the Project Browser, open Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan
- Design.
18 Type WT, and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally.
19 In the floor plan, zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building.
20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler.
21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel, and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the
Type Selector drop-down.
22 In the 200A Corridor space, click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown,
and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

Because the sprinkler is not hosted, it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". Next, you adjust
the offset.

23 Right-click the sprinkler, and click Element Properties.


24 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 10' 6".
This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 - FP_Ceiling view.
Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down, it must be positioned above
the piping to which it will be connected.

25 Click OK.
Array sprinklers

26 With the sprinkler still selected, click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array.
27 On the Options Bar:
■ Clear Group And Associate.

■ For Number, enter 11.


This number is determined in the schedule, by adding the minimum number of sprinklers
for the 3 corridor spaces combined.

28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point, move the cursor to the right, enter
14' 6", and press Enter.
29 Press Esc.
Notice that the schedule updates, indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces
have been met.

Adding Sprinklers | 283


30 Close the file with or without saving it.
In this exercise, you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. In the next exercise, you
connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection), and with piping (physical connection).

Creating a Piping System


In this exercise, you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed.
A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. This logical connection
allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. You create fire protection systems
by placing sprinklers, and then creating the logical connection between these system components.
After creating the logical connection, you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping.
Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify
pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. This is the recommended workflow or best practice
for systems creation in Revit MEP.

IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default
system. Unlike logical connections (systems), physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.
However, piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.

Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection
Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Floor
Plans ➤ Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.

284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System


2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building.
Explore the System Browser

3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.


4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area.
5 Right-click the header, click View ➤ Systems, and select Piping.
6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers
that you placed in the building.

IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category
in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system
after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. As you assign sprinklers to systems,
they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder.

Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.

Connect sprinklers with a system

7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces, as shown.

8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire
protection wet system, and assign the selected sprinklers to it.
The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. The wet system that
logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. It
does not indicate a pipe layout path.

In the System Browser, all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire
Protection Wet folder to the new system folder, named Fire Protection Wet, within the Piping
Systems folder.

Creating a Piping System | 285


Now that the sprinklers are logically connected, you use the System Browser to confirm and
validate the system.

TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears, place the cursor over a sprinkler,
press Tab, and select the system.

Confirm and validate the system

9 In the System Browser, double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of
sprinklers.
You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically
connects the sprinklers.

10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1, and click Select.


The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red, indicating the logical connection.
Next, you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.

Create the initial layout

The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system, select an initial piping layout, and make
preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that
you configured earlier in this tutorial. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to
physical piping.

11 With the system still selected, click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.
The Edit Piping System panel displays, providing system editing tools. Notice that the Options
Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name, system equipment, and number of elements
in the system.

12 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter FP Wet_Zone2.


13 In the System Browser, expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers.
14 Click Finish Editing System.
15 In the drawing area, select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2.
16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.
The Generate Layout tools are activated, and a piping layout preview displays.

NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected.

17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions, and on the Options Bar, click
Settings.
18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog:
■ In the left pane, verify that Main is selected.

■ For Pipe Type, verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet is selected.

■ For Offset, verify that 9' 0" is specified.


This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2.

■ In the left pane, select Branch.

■ Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch.

NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the
main and other obstacles.

19 Click OK.

286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System


20 On the Generate Layout panel, click Place Base.
21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component, as shown.

The base component provides a source for the fire protection system.

22 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2".


23 For Offset, enter -12' 0".
When the layout is finished, these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that
extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0").

24 On the Generate Layout panel, click Solutions.


25 On the Options Bar:
■ For Solution Type, verify that Network is selected.

■ Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions, and select solution 5.
The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. The layout path
solution displays (blue represents the main piping run, and green represents branch lines).

Modify the layout

26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. In general, the method for moving
segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping:

■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an (elbow control)
displays at the junction.

Creating a Piping System | 287


■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction
control) displays at the junction. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired

location, and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.
On the Generate Layout panel, click Modify.
27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point.

A (parallel movement control) displays.

28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the
corridor sprinklers, as shown.

29 Click Finish Layout.


The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. All of the fittings required to connect
the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. This pipe run physically
connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2.

288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System


IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path
conversion or pipe sizing. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space
to create a pipe or a fitting, or that offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system
components, select a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe.

View the system in 3D

30 Open FP - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection.


31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system.
32 If necessary, click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.

33 Close the file with or without saving it.


Next, you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current
wet system to logically connect them, and then you create piping to physically connect them.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System


In this exercise, you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2
system using the Layout Path tool, the Connect Into tool, and various manual pipe creation tools.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289


Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection
Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.rvt.

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Floor
Plans ➤ Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Zoom in, and select the elbow fitting as shown.

3 If necessary, click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.

4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee.

290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System


The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the
sprinklers in the corridor.

5 In the drawing area, select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system.
System tools display on the Piping Systems tab.

IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers, air terminals, radiators, mechanical equipment,
and so on) are logically connected by a system, and pipe or duct is created, you can select the pipe
or duct, or a system component to display system tools. This allows you to modify the system (logical
connection).

6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to
the system.
7 On the Edit Piping System panel, click Add To System.
8 In the corridor, draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as
shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers).

Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar.

9 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System.


The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. You can confirm the sprinkler system
assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser.

10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor, and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate
Layout.
11 On the Generate Layout panel, verify that Solutions is selected.
12 On the Options Bar, for Solution Type, verify that Network is selected, and select solution 5.
13 Click Finish Layout.

The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier.

14 Close the System Browser.


Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system

15 In the drawing area, select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system.
16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.
17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers.
18 Click Finish Editing System.
Connect the sprinklers with pipe

19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291


20 Open Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection, and then tile the views.
21 In the Piping Plan, zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping, and select the
leftmost unconnected sprinkler.
22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into, and select the horizontal segment
of main piping as shown.

23 View the result in the 3D view.


Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added.

24 In the Piping Plan, pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler.
25 Select the sprinkler, right-click, and click Draw Pipe.
26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type
Selector drop-down.
27 On the Options Bar, for Offset, select 9'.
28 In the drawing area, click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint,
and then press Esc.
29 Using the same method, draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe.

292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System


Layout in 2D

Layout in 3D

Verify connectivity

30 Close the 3D view.


31 In the plan view, zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.
32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe, and press Tab twice to highlight the entire
system.
Because the whole system highlights, it’s a visual indication that all components are connected
correctly.

33 Close the file with or without saving it.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293


Adding Vertical Supply Piping
In this exercise, you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. You also place a
hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection
Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i.rvt.

Create a section view

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Floor
Plans ➤ Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner.
3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.
4 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 1/4" = 1'-0".
5 Draw the section:
■ In the drawing area, click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line
start point.

■ Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.

6 Press Esc.
Specify section properties

7 In the drawing area, double-click on the section head to open the section view.

294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System


8 Right-click, and click View Properties.
9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design.

■ For View Classification, select Design.

■ Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair.

■ For Default View Template, select MEP Section.

■ Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click
Apply Default View Template.
11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe.
12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up.
13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee.
14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe.
15 Press Spacebar.
16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type
Selector drop-down.
17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295


18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.
19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view.
Add mechanical equipment

20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.


21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet -
Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list.
22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown,
and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet.


24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System


25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down.
26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm.
27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active.
28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view.


Add a valve

30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.


31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family.
32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12
Inch.rfa, and click Open.
33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected.
34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then
click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297


A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System


Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design
specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler
schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection
Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views

1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and
double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view.
2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally.
3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown.
You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter,
height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered
sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based
on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool
and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height.

Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run

The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications
require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for
all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately.
4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around
the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe
or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299


5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.
6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK.
7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1".
8 Click Modify.
All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes

9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs).
10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.
11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor.
12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, .
13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open.
14 On the Options Bar:
■ Verify that Horizontal is selected.

■ Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place
the tag.
The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed.

Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System


Modify the diameter of the main

16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file.


17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.
By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select.

18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section
highlights, press Tab.
This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement.

20 Click to select the main piping between these points.


The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301


21 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 4".
The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System


22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view.
23 Close the 3D view, and maximize the floor plan.
Modify the diameter of branch pipes

The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.
24 In the drawing area, select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the
stairs), as shown.

25 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1 1/4".


The pipe diameter is modified.

26 Using the same method, change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate
sprinklers, and then tag the piping as shown.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303


27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial.
28 Close the file with or without saving it.
In this exercise, you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters.
You added tags to pipes, allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. The pipe run now complies
with the design criteria. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.
For additional practice, use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system.
Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.
In this tutorial, you created a wet fire protection system. You also learned the difference between creating
rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems, and the difference between how the software
sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. The completed fire protection system is included in
the RME_FP_Design_06_i.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training
Files. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Explore different system
designs and discover the power of Revit MEP.

304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System


Documenting a Project

In this tutorial, you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views, add annotations and dimensions, create
details, and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.

305
306
Creating Documentation
Views 13
In this lesson, you begin the construction documentation for the building project. You learn to create:

■ a duplicate plan view, and apply a view template.


■ dependent views, matchlines, and view references.
■ a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view.
■ callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view.

Duplicating Plan Views


In this exercise, you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. You then change the
properties of the new view by applying a view template.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\06_Construction
Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i.rvt.

Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan

1 In the Project Browser, under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans,
right-click Level 1, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. If the view
included detail graphics, you’d select Duplicate with Detailing.

2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of Level 1, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan, and click OK.
Apply a view template

4 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan, and click Properties.

307
5 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template, select HVAC
Duct Plan-Documentation, and click OK.
6 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan, and click Apply Default View
Template.
The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style, and the floor plan is moved
to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy.

Creating Dependent Views


Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale, you use dependent views to accommodate
such large buildings. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you
to create smaller, more focused, views and put them on the sheet. The smaller (dependent) views inherit
view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\06_Construction
Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i.rvt.

Duplicate a view to create dependent views

1 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor


Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.
2 Right-click the dependent view title, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A, and click OK.
4 Using the same method, create dependent views for areas B and C.
Create matchlines

Matchlines are used with dependent views, to delineate splits in a large floor plan. You crop a dependent
view to show only the area marked by the matchline.
5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view.
6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline.
7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties.
8 In the Instance Properties dialog, verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited.
You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. This is useful when breaking up
plans with varying geometries across levels.

9 Click OK.
10 In the drawing area, click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and
below gridline C.
11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point, as shown, and then press
Esc.

308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views


12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H.

13 Press Esc twice.


14 Click Finish Matchline.
Modify object styles

15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline.


16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.
17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog, select Matchline:
■ For Line Color, click the current value.

■ In the Color dialog, select black, and click OK.

■ For Line Pattern, select Double Dash 5/8".

■ For Line Weight, select 11.

■ Click OK.

Creating view references

18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference.


19 In the drawing area, click above and below the modified matchline to create view references
(displayed as - / ---), and then press Esc.

20 Select the upper view reference and, on the Options Bar, for Target view, select Floor Plan: Level
1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.
21 Using the same method, apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference.

Creating Dependent Views | 309


22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline, and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it.
23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.
24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries, as shown.

25 Using the same method, crop the dependent views for plans B and C.
Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B

Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C

26 Open Sheet M201, and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet.
27 Using the same method, drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203.
28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view, and zoom to each of the view references.
The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on
sheets, indicating the detail and sheet number of each view.

310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views


29 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser


In this exercise, you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic
water.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\06_Construction
Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i.rvt.

Duplicate a view and specify properties

1 In the Project Browser, under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views,


right-click 3D Plumbing, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
2 Zoom in, and select the section box.
3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.
You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently.

4 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing, and click Properties.


5 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter Plumbing Isometric - Domestic Water.

■ For Default View Template, select Plumbing Isometric.

■ Under Graphics, for View Classification, select Documentation.

■ For Sub-Discipline, select Plumbing.

■ Click OK.

6 In the Project Browser, right-click Plumbing Isometric - Domestic Water, and click Apply Default
View Template.
The section crop lines no longer display.

7 Zoom in to the plumbing system.


8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping, press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run, and
click to select it.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311


9 Right-click, and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.
10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog:
■ For Weight, select 3.

■ For Pattern, select Dash.

■ Click Apply, and then click OK.

The selected piping displays as a dashed line.

11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater, press Tab 3 times, and
click to select it.

12 Using the same method, change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16".

312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views


13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks, press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe
network highlights, as shown), and click to select it.

14 Right-click, and click Hide in View ➤ Elements.


This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313


15 Press Esc.
16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.
17 Label the fixtures as shown.
Click in the drawing area to start a text label, and then click in empty space in the drawing to
end the label.

18 Using methods learned previously, create a sanitary riser isometric view:


■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric - Domestic Water view with detailing, and rename the
new view Plumbing Isometric - Sanitary Waste.

■ Unhide the sanitary waste piping:


■ On the View Control Bar, click Reveal Hidden Elements.

■ On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.

■ In the drawing area, highlight a segment of the sanitary piping, press Tab 3 times, and
click to select it.

■ Right-click, and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements.

■ On the View Control Bar, click Close Reveal Hidden Elements.

■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.

314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views


Add a spot slope annotation

19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units.


20 In the Project Units dialog:
■ For Discipline, verify that Common is selected.

■ For Slope, click on the Format value.

■ In the Format dialog, for Rounding, select To the nearest 1/8".

21 Click OK twice.
22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope.
23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it.
24 Move the cursor above the pipe, and click to place the spot slope annotation, as shown.

25 Press Esc twice.


26 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating Callout Views


In this exercise, you use a plan view to create a callout view, and then place the callout view on a sheet.
When the view is associated with a sheet, the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet
information.

Creating Callout Views | 315


Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\06_Construction
Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i.rvt.

Create a floor plan callout

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor
Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan).
3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.
4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel, and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.
5 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 1/4"=1'-0''.
6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown, beginning at the upper left and ending at the
lower right.

7 Modify the callout leader:


■ Select the callout boundary.

■ Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout
head), and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary.

316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views


8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as
shown.

Modify callout boundary line weight

9 Press Esc to clear the selection.


10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.
11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog:
■ For the Callout Boundary category, for Line Weight, select 5.

■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and, using the same method, change the line weight
for the Callout Leader Line to 5.

■ Click OK.

Place the view on a sheet

12 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click M601 - HVAC Duct Plan & Sections.
13 In the Project Browser, select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan, drag it to the sheet, and click
in the empty space at the top center to place it.

Creating Callout Views | 317


Rename the detail view and modify view settings

14 Zoom to the callout view, and select the viewport.


15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance
Properties.
16 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP.

■ For Title on Sheet, enter WSHP PART PLAN.

■ For Default View Template, select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.

■ Click OK.

17 In the Project Browser, right-click the callout view, and click Apply Default View Template.
The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine.
Ductwork in coarse detail

318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views


Ductwork in fine detail

Create a detail callout

18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.


The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.

19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.
20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section.

Creating Callout Views | 319


21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.
22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel, and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down.
23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown.

24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view.


25 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC - Design ➤ Detail Views
(Detail), right-click the detail view, and click Rename.
26 In the Rename View dialog, enter Typical WSHP Detail, and click OK.
27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail, and click Apply View Template.
28 In the Apply View Template dialog, under Names, select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation,
and click OK.
The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project
Browser hierarchy.

29 Close the file with or without saving it.

320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views


Working with Annotations
and Dimensions 14
In this lesson, you learn how to:

■ add text notes, duct tags, and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan.

■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures.

■ work with model-based components, linetypes, symbols, and annotation to create a legend.

321
Creating Annotations
In this exercise, you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\06_Construction
Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i.rvt.

Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan

1 In the Project Browser, under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans, double-click Level
2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view.
2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C, as shown.

3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.


4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel, and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.

5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center).


6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air
grilles, and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS.
7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.

8 With the text still selected, use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so
that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall.

322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions


9 Press Esc twice.
Add leaders

10 Select the text box.


11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight, and then click Right
Straight.
12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Use the leader segment
grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box, as shown.
13 Press Esc to clear the selection.

Add diffuser and duct tags by category

14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.


15 On the Options Bar, verify that Leader is cleared.
16 In the drawing area, select a supply diffuser, a return diffuser, a segment of round duct, and a
segment of rectangular duct.

Creating Annotations | 323


The information on each tag varies according to the category of element.

17 Click Modify.
Tag remaining diffusers

18 Using the same method, tag the remaining diffusers in the area. If necessary, move diffuser tags
off the ductwork.

Load tags from library

19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.


20 In the Tags dialog, click Load.
21 In the Load Family dialog, navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct, select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.rfa
and Flex Duct Tag Round.rfa, and click Open.
22 In the Tags dialog, under Category, for Ducts, verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation
Duct Tag, and click OK.
Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation

In order to display additional information about an element, you can annotate the element with a second
tag type.

23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.


24 On the Options Bar, clear Leader.

324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions


25 In the drawing area, select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct,
as shown.

26 On the Options Bar, specify Tag Orientation as Vertical.


27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP, and then press Esc.

Place tags with leaders

28 In the Project Browser, open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe
Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A.
29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A.
30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.
31 On the Options Bar, select Horizontal, Leader, and Attached End.
32 In the drawing area, select the select the large pipe on the right as shown.

Creating Annotations | 325


33 On the Options Bar, for Leader, select Free End.
34 In the drawing area, click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor, as shown.

35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown.

326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions


36 Press Esc twice.
Edit a tag type

You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style.
37 In the drawing area, select the last tag placed.
38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.
39 In the Type Properties dialog, for Leader Arrowhead, select Dot Open 1/16", and click OK.
40 Using the method learned previously, tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown.
Notice that the new tags you place use the new style, and the tags placed previously have changed
to the new style as well. That’s because you changed a type property, not simply an instance
property, and all elements of that type are affected.

41 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you use temporary dimensions to locate, lay out, and lock lighting fixtures.

Creating Dimensions | 327


Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\06_Construction
Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i.rvt.

Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor
Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted, indicating that it’s the
active view.
2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan.
3 Select the upper left lighting fixture.
4 Using the Move Witness Line control, drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall
on the left side of the selected lighting fixture.

5 Click to create a permanent dimension.


6 Press Esc to clear the selection.
Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature

7 In the drawing area, select the dimension line.


On the Options Bar, notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. You can modify the preferred
condition for dimension face selection.

8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines.
9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right.
10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures, and then select the interior face of the wall.
11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish.

12 Press Esc.

328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions


13 Using the same method, add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in
the room.

Lock dimensions between fixtures

14 Select the center dimension line.

15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures, click the 3 interior locks on the line.

16 Press Esc.
Modify dimensions to offset fixtures

17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line.


18 Select the dimension value (7' - 3 1/2"), enter 8', and press Enter.
Because the dimensions are locked, the fixtures shift to maintain constraints.

19 Using the same methods, lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows,
and offset them 8' from the wall.
20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Legend
In this exercise, you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components, annotation
symbols, linework, and notes.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

Creating a Legend | 329


■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\06_Construction
Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i.rvt.

Create a legend view

1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.


2 In the New Legend View dialog:
■ For Name, enter Diffuser Legend.

■ For Scale, select 1/4" = 1' -0".

■ Click OK.

Create a legend title

3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.


4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel, and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.
5 Click in the drawing area, and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND.
6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.
Add model element detail components

7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.


8 On the Options Bar:
■ For Family, select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8
Neck.

■ For View, select Floor Plan.

9 In the drawing area, click below the title to place the diffuser.

10 Using the same method, place:


■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection

■ Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection

■ Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser - Sidewall : 18 x 8

330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions


11 Press Esc.
Add detail component text descriptions

12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.


13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel, and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down
list.
14 In the drawing area, click next to the top diffuser, and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER.
15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment, annotate the
remaining components:
■ RETURN DIFFUSER

■ EXHAUST GRILL

■ SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER

16 Click Modify.

Creating a Legend | 331


Create a legend symbol

17 In the Project Browser, open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view.


18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE - DROP and its text note.

19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.


20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE - RISE symbol for the copy start point, and
then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE - DROP symbol to specify the copy
end point.

21 Press Esc.
22 Zoom in to the copied component.
23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.

24 Select the component’s break line, and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.
25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.
26 Press Esc.

27 While pressing Ctrl, select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.
28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel, select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down, and
then press Esc.
The selected detail lines are now thin.

29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.

332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions


30 Select Spot Elevation - Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down.
31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol, and then click Modify.

32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.


33 Click to the left of the left break line, enter E, and then click Modify.

34 Using the method learned previously, mirror the text on the center reference line of the
component.

35 Change the text on the right to N, and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT
TO EXISTING DUCT.
36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.

Place legend views on a sheet

37 In the Project Browser, double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 - MECHANICAL LEGEND.


38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet, in the Ductwork-Sheet
Metal column.

Creating a Legend | 333


39 With the viewport still selected, click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel, and select No
Title from the Type Selector drop-down.
40 Press Esc.

41 Close the file with or without saving it.

334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions


Detailing
15
In this lesson, you will create:

■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.


■ A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail.
■ A drafting view using detail components, detail groups, and text.
■ A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail.
■ A detail callout that references another view.

Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail


In this exercise, you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation
of creating a one-line diagram.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\06_Construction
Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i.rvt.

Tag electrical panels

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor
Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted, indicating that it’s the active
view.
2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser - 113 East elevation view.

335
3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.
4 On the Options Bar, clear Leader.
5 In the drawing area, select each of the 2 panelboards.

Next, you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet, and then modify and align
the views.

Place views on a sheet

6 In the Project Browser, double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 - Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make
it the active view.
7 Drag the Power Riser - 113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at
the upper left of sheet E101, and click to place it.
Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the
east elevation view.

8 Using the same method, place Power Riser - 113 East on the sheet.
Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place
them.

336 | Chapter 15 Detailing


9 Press Esc.
10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet.
Modify level lines

11 In the drawing area, select the 113 North view, right-click, and click Activate View.
12 Select the Level 1 line, and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the
level line to the right.
Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left, giving the appearance of a
single view.

13 Right-click, and click Deactivate View.


Modify a viewport title

14 Select the title of the 113 North view, and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element
Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.
15 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Title on Sheet, enter Electrical Power
Riser Diagram, and click OK.

Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337


Remove a viewport title display

16 Select the 113 East view.


17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel, and select No Title from the Type Selector
drop-down.
Align elevation views to resemble a single view

18 In the drawing area, select the 113 East elevation view, right-click, and click Activate View.
19 Select the Level 1 line, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.
20 Select the 113 East elevation view again.
21 Using the drag control, move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view, as
shown.
You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. In the next exercise, you add wiring
to the diagram.

22 Press Esc.
23 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating Detail Wiring


In this exercise, you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. You also create
a detail group and annotate the diagram.

338 | Chapter 15 Detailing


Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\06_Construction
Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i.rvt.

Create a linetype

1 In the Project Browser, verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 - Electrical Power Riser Diagram is
highlighted, indicating that it’s the active view.
2 Close the Project Browser.
This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram.

3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles.
4 In the Line Styles dialog:
■ Under Category, expand Lines.

■ Under Modify Subcategories, click New.

■ In the New Subcategory dialog, for Name, enter Electrical Power, and click OK.

■ In the Line Styles dialog, for Line Weight, select 6, and then click OK.

Draw linework to create a wiring diagram

5 In the drawing area, zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of
the Power Riser - 113 North view.
6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.
7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel, and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector
drop-down.
8 On the Options Bar, verify that Chain is selected.
9 Beginning at the transformer, draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB), as
shown.

As you draw, notice that there are no snaps active. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls
to make sure the lines clean up properly.

Creating Detail Wiring | 339


10 Press Esc.
11 Using the same method, add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on
level 3 (MDP_3).

12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.


13 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 1/8".
14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard, as shown.

340 | Chapter 15 Detailing


15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.
16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.

17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.

TIP When you use the Trim tool, you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.

18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim.
19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line, so that the result is as shown.

Creating Detail Wiring | 341


20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown.

Add a break symbol and note

You create the break symbol and text note once, and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.
21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.

342 | Chapter 15 Detailing


22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc).


24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel, as shown.
The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining
points of the arc.

25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.


26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader, and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal:
(Center).
27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel, and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector
drop-down.
28 Click above the cap, and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE.
29 Click Modify.
Copy the symbol and text

30 Select the text, and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown.

Creating Detail Wiring | 343


31 While pressing Ctrl, select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.
32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.
33 On the Options Bar, select Multiple.
34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.

35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B
and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

344 | Chapter 15 Detailing


36 Press Esc.
Create a ground wire

You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. You enter exact values for each line length.

37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.


38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard, click to specify the start point of the first horizontal
line.
39 Move the cursor to the right, enter 0 0.5, and press Enter.
40 Press Esc.

41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.


42 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3/32".
43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line, and then press Esc.

Creating Detail Wiring | 345


44 Edit the offset lines:
■ Select the middle line, click on the length dimension value, enter 0 0.25, and press Enter.

■ Using the same method, change the length of the bottom line to 0 0.125.

■ Press Esc.

Create a detail group

By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire, you can ensure that they stay together. You can also
specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately.

45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the
browser view.
46 In the Project Browser, expand Groups ➤ Detail.
47 In the drawing area, while pressing Ctrl, select all 3 lines.
48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.
49 In the Create Detail Group dialog, for Name, enter Ground, and click OK.
Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser.

50 With the group selected, drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail
line, and then press Esc.

346 | Chapter 15 Detailing


51 Using the method learned previously, draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of
the switchboard.
52 Select the detail group, and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.
53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point, and then click the endpoint of the
detail line as the move end point.

54 Select the group, and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.
55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B, TP-2B, and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group
in those locations.
56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer.

Creating Detail Wiring | 347


Pin wires and view

You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally.
57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right), select the entire
Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.
58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.

59 Close the file with or without saving it.


In later exercises, you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here, and will place it on
sheet E01.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail


In this exercise, you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric
detail view. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the
detail components.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\06_Construction
Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i.rvt.

Prepare the view

1 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D


Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
2 Right-click the copy, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail, and click
OK.
4 Right-click the ViewCube, and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air.
5 Zoom in to view the section.

348 | Chapter 15 Detailing


6 Select the section box, and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first
floor.

7 On the ViewCube, click Home, and then click the corner where the Top, Back, and Left sides
converge, and then press Esc.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349


Apply a view template

8 In the Project Browser, right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail, and click Apply View
Template.
9 In the View Templates dialog:
■ For Show Type, select 3D Views, Walkthroughs.

■ Under Names, select 3D HVAC Iso.

■ Click OK.

This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components.

Hide elements in a view

10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.
You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created.

Annotate the view

11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.


12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel, and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.
13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.

350 | Chapter 15 Detailing


14 Place the label:
■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader.

■ Move the cursor down and to the left, and click to specify the second leader point.

■ Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point.

■ Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1.

■ Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

15 Using the same method, label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide
Motorized Damper); Typical.
16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct, and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown.

Change text alignment

17 With the text still selected, click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right).
18 Press Esc.

19 Complete the text labels, as shown.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351


To rotate and reposition a text label, select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that
display.

Modify the view

20 In the drawing area, type VP to open the instance properties for the view.
21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Extents, select Crop Region Visible, and then click OK.
22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible.
23 Click on the crop region, and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail,
as shown.

24 Access the instance properties for the view, and under Extents, select Crop View and clear Crop
Region Visible.
25 Click OK.
26 Zoom to the drawing extents.
Place the view on a sheet

27 In the Project Browser, open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS.
28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet.

352 | Chapter 15 Detailing


29 In the drawing area, select the isometric view, and then select Viewport Square from the Type
Selector drop-down.
30 Close the file with or without saving it.

Drafting Detail Components


In this exercise, you:

■ Create a drafting view.

■ Place a detail component.

■ Work with a filled region that represents a detail component.

■ Use detail lines to create a detail group.

■ Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes.

Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\06_Construction
Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i.rvt.

Create a drafting view

1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View.


2 In the New Drafting View dialog:
■ For Name, enter Typical Floor Drain Detail.

■ For Scale, select 3" = 1'-0".

■ Click OK.

The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting
Views (Detail). By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification, you can more accurately
locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy.

3 In the Project Browser, right-click the view name, and click Properties.

Drafting Detail Components | 353


4 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select Plumbing.

■ For View Classification, select Documentation.

■ Click OK.

Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser.

Place a floor drain detail component

5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.


6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel, and select Floor Drain with
Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down.
7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component.
8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.
9 Zoom in to the component.

Use a filled region to create a concrete slab

10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region.

11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle).


12 On the Element panel, select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.
13 In the drawing area, click the point at the top of the drain, as shown, as the rectangle start point.

14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2".

354 | Chapter 15 Detailing


15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.
16 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Type, select C.I.P. Concrete, and click OK.
17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.
18 With the filled region still selected, click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back
drop-down ➤ Send to Back, and then press Esc.

Add a structural metal deck detail group

19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.
20 Select 1.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down.
21 In the drawing area, click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion
point.
22 Click Modify.

Modify the boundary of the filled region

You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck.
23 In the drawing area, select the filled region.
24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary.

25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Line).
26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region.
27 Using the following illustration as a guide, click to select the indicated points in succession from
left to right to define the new boundary.

Drafting Detail Components | 355


28 Click Modify.

29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew, press Tab to highlight the chain of lines, and then click
to select them.
30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.
31 On the Options Bar, select Multiple.
32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point, and then click point 6 as the endpoint.
33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain.
34 Press Esc.

35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab.

36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.
37 Select the small vertical line you just drew, and then select the base of the slab to the right of
the line.

356 | Chapter 15 Detailing


38 Pan to the other end of the slab.
39 Select the line between points 1 and 2, and then select the side of the slab above the line.

40 Click Finish Region, and then press Esc.


41 Type ZF to zoom out.
The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.

Create a floor component

42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.


43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.

44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle).


45 Using the method learned previously, draw a rectangle on top of the filled region, as shown.
This represents the vinyl composition flooring.

Drafting Detail Components | 357


Create a detail group

46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.


47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down.
48 Using the existing thin line as a guide, draw wide detail lines as shown.

49 Click Modify.
50 Highlight one of the wide lines, press Tab to highlight the chain, and then click to select them.
51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.
52 In the Create Group dialog, for Name, enter Flashing Membrane_F.D., and click OK.
Modify the group origin point

53 In the drawing area, select the Flashing Membrane group.


Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.

54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines, as shown.

358 | Chapter 15 Detailing


55 Press Esc.
Add breaklines

56 Type ZO to zoom out.


57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.
58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down.
59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.
60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location, as shown.

61 Using the same method, add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge.

Drafting Detail Components | 359


62 Press Esc twice.
Modify breakline boundaries

63 Select the left breakline, and use the grips to resize the masking region, as shown.

64 Press Esc twice.


Add a keynote

You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object.

65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User.


66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down.
67 On the Options Bar, select Leader and Free End.
68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag.
69 Click twice to place the leader as shown.

70 In the Keynotes dialog, select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16.A1 Floor Drain


W/O Waterproofing, and then click OK.
71 Click Modify.
72 If necessary, select the keynote and drag the text to the right.

360 | Chapter 15 Detailing


Add text notes

You add text notes to continue annotating the view.

73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.


74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.

75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right).


76 To select the leader start point, click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following
image.

77 Move the cursor up and to the left, and click to specify the second leader point.
78 Move the cursor to the left, and click to specify the text insertion point.
79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange, and then click anywhere in the view
to finish editing.
80 Press Esc twice.
81 Select the text note, and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown.

Drafting Detail Components | 361


82 Continue annotating the detail, as shown.

Add dimensions

You add a dimension with multiple references.

83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.


84 Using the following image as a guide, click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing


85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line, and then press Esc twice.

Place the detail on a sheet

86 In the Project Browser, open P103 - Plumbing Part Plans & Details.
87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet, and
click to place it.

88 In the drawing area, select the view title.


89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.
90 Press Esc.
91 Close the file with or without saving it.

Drafting Detail Components | 363


Importing a CAD Drawing
In this exercise, you import a CAD detail drawing, and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing.
Training File

■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\06_Construction
Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i.rvt.

Import a CAD detail drawing

1 In the Project Browser, double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting


Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view.
2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD.
3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog:
■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation, and select Roof Drain
Overflow Imperial.dwg.

■ For Colors, select Black and White.

■ For Layers, select Visible.

■ For Import units, select Auto-Detect.

■ Click Open.

4 Type ZF to zoom the view.


Modify the CAD drawing line weight

5 Zoom to the left side of the detail.

6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.
7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog:
■ Under Category, expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial.

■ For A-----NPP, for Line Weight, select 3.

■ Click OK.

364 | Chapter 15 Detailing


8 Type ZF.
Place the detail on a sheet

9 In the Project Browser, open P103 - Plumbing Part Plans & Details.
10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet.
11 Press Esc.

12 In the drawing area, select the viewport title.


13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel, and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector
drop-down.
14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport, and then press Esc.

15 Close the file with or without saving it.

Importing a CAD Drawing | 365


366